A2 - Workbook 3 Updated PDF

PA GE 1
QUANTUM PHYSICS
CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

PA GE 2
1 May/June 2009 , Question #8 , qp_4

15
8 (a) Explain why, for the photoelectric effect, the existence of a threshold frequency and a For
very short emission time provide evidence for the particulate nature of electromagnetic Examiner’s
radiation, as opposed to a wave theory. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) State and explain two relations in which the Planck constant h is the constant of
proportionality.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[6]

© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09 [Turn over
PA GE 3
2 Oct/Nov 2010 , Question #7 , qp_41

16
7 (a) State an effect, one in each case, that provides evidence for For
Examiner’s
(i) the wave nature of a particle, Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Four electron energy levels in an atom are shown in Fig. 7.1.
–0.87 × 10–19 J
–1.36 × 10–19 J
electron
energy –2.42 × 10–19 J
–5.44 × 10–19 J
Fig. 7.1 (not to scale)
An emission spectrum is associated with the electron transitions between these energy
levels.
For this spectrum,
(i) state the number of lines,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) calculate the minimum wavelength.
wavelength = ........................................... m [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/O/N/10

PA GE 4
3 Oct/Nov 2010 , Question #8 , qp_43 18
8 (a) By reference to the photoelectric effect, state what is meant by the threshold frequency. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The surface of a zinc plate has a work function of 5.8 × 10–19 J.
In a particular laboratory experiment, ultraviolet light of wavelength 120 nm is incident
on the zinc plate. A photoelectric current I is detected.
In order to view the apparatus more clearly, a second lamp emitting light of wavelength
450 nm is switched on. No change is made to the ultraviolet lamp.
Using appropriate calculations, state and explain the effect on the photoelectric current
of switching on this second lamp.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2010 9702/43/O/N/10
PA GE 5
4 May/June 2011 , Question #7 , qp_41 14
7 Experiments are conducted to investigate the photoelectric effect. For

Examiner’s
(a) It is found that, on exposure of a metal surface to light, either electrons are emitted Use
immediately or they are not emitted at all.
Suggest why this observation does not support a wave theory of light.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Data for the wavelength λ of the radiation incident on the metal surface and the maximum
kinetic energy EK of the emitted electrons are shown in Fig. 7.1.
λ / nm EK / 10–19 J
650 –
240 4.44
Fig. 7.1
(i) Without any calculation, suggest why no value is given for EK for radiation of
wavelength 650 nm.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use data from Fig. 7.1 to determine the work function energy of the surface.
work function energy = ............................................. J [3]

© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11
PA GE 6
15
(c) Radiation of wavelength 240 nm gives rise to a maximum photoelectric current I. For
The intensity of the incident radiation is maintained constant and the wavelength is now Examiner’s
reduced. Use
State and explain the effect of this change on
(i) the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) the maximum photoelectric current I.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

PA GE 7
7 (a) Explain how the line spectrum of hydrogen provides evidence for the existence of For
discrete electron energy levels in atoms. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Some electron energy levels in atomic hydrogen are illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
–0.85 eV
–1.50 eV
energy
A B
–3.40 eV
Fig. 7.1
Two possible electron transitions A and B giving rise to an emission spectrum are
shown.
These electron transitions cause light of wavelengths 654 nm and 488 nm to be emitted.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow to show a third possible transition. [1]
(ii) Calculate the wavelength of the emitted light for the transition in (i).
wavelength = ............................................ m [3]

© UCLES 2011 9702/41/O/N/11 [Turn over
PA GE 8
16
(c) The light in a beam has a continuous spectrum of wavelengths from 400 nm to 700 nm. For
The light is incident on some cool hydrogen gas, as illustrated in Fig. 7.2. Examiner’s
Use
incident emergent
light cool hydrogen gas light
Fig. 7.2
Using the values of wavelength in (b), state and explain the appearance of the spectrum
of the emergent light.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/O/N/11

PA GE 9
7 An explanation of the photoelectric effect includes the terms photon energy and work function For
energy. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Explain what is meant by
(i) a photon,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) work function energy.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) In an experiment to investigate the photoelectric effect, a student measures the

wavelength λ of the light incident on a metal surface and the maximum kinetic energy
1
Emax of the emitted electrons. The variation with Emax of is shown in Fig. 7.1.
λ
4
1 106 m–1
λ /
0
–4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4
Emax / 10–19 J
Fig. 7.1
(i) The work function energy of the metal surface is Φ.

State an equation, in terms of λ, Φ and Emax, to represent conservation of energy
for the photoelectric effect. Explain any other symbols you use.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/O/N/11
(ii) work function energy.
..................................................................................................................................
PA GE 10
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) In an experiment to investigate the photoelectric effect, a student measures the

wavelength λ of the light incident on a metal surface and the maximum kinetic energy
1
Emax of the emitted electrons. The variation with Emax of is shown in Fig. 7.1.
λ
4
1 106 m–1
λ /
0
–4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4
Emax / 10–19 J
Fig. 7.1
(i) The work function energy of the metal surface is Φ.

State an equation, in terms of λ, Φ and Emax, to represent conservation of energy
for the photoelectric effect. Explain any other symbols you use.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/O/N/11

PA GE 11
15
(ii) Use your answer in (i) and Fig. 7.1 to determine For
Examiner’s
1. the work function energy Φ of the metal surface, Use
Φ = ............................................. J [2]
2. a value for the Planck constant.
Planck constant = ........................................... J s [3]
CEDAR
© UCLESCOLLEGE
2011 9702/43/O/N/11 [Turn over
PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
PA GE 12
7 The photoelectric effect may be represented by the equation For

Examiner’s
photon energy = work function energy + maximum kinetic energy of electron. Use
(a) State what is meant by work function energy.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic energy EK of photoelectrons
emitted from the surface of sodium metal is shown in Fig. 7.1.
0.8
0.6
EK / eV
0.4
0.2
0
4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0
f / 1014 Hz
Fig. 7.1
Use the gradient of the graph of Fig. 7.1 to determine a value for the Planck constant h.
Show your working.
h = ............................................. J s [2]

PA GE 13
16
(c) The sodium metal in (b) has a work function energy of 2.4 eV. The sodium is replaced by For
calcium which has a work function energy of 2.9 eV. Examiner’s
Use
On Fig. 7.1, draw a line to show the variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic
energy EK of photoelectrons emitted from the surface of calcium. [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

PA GE 14

15
7 Some data for the work function energy Φ and the threshold frequency f0 of some metal For
surfaces are given in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
metal Φ / 10–19 J f0 / 1014 Hz

sodium 3.8 5.8
zinc 5.8 8.8
platinum 9.0
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i) State what is meant by the threshold frequency.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Calculate the threshold frequency for platinum.
threshold frequency = ............................................ Hz [2]
(b) Electromagnetic radiation having a continuous spectrum of wavelengths between

300 nm and 600 nm is incident, in turn, on each of the metals listed in Fig. 7.1.
Determine which metals, if any, will give rise to the emission of electrons.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) When light of a particular intensity and frequency is incident on a metal surface,
electrons are emitted.
State and explain the effect, if any, on the rate of emission of electrons from this surface
for light of the same intensity and higher frequency.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
PA GE 15

14
7 (a) The emission spectrum of atomic hydrogen consists of a number of discrete wavelengths. For
Explain how this observation leads to an understanding that there are discrete electron Examiner’s
energy levels in atoms. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Some electron energy levels in atomic hydrogen are illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
–0.54 eV
–0.85 eV
–1.5 eV
energy
–3.4 eV
Fig. 7.1

© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13
PA GE 16
15
The longest wavelength produced as a result of electron transitions between two of the For
energy levels shown in Fig. 7.1 is 4.0 × 10–6 m. Examiner’s
Use
(i) On Fig. 7.1,
1. draw, and mark with the letter L, the transition giving rise to the wavelength of
4.0 × 10–6 m, [1]
2. draw, and mark with the letter S, the transition giving rise to the shortest
wavelength. [1]
(ii) Calculate the wavelength for the transition you have shown in (i) part 2.
wavelength = ............................................. m [3]
(c) Photon energies in the visible spectrum vary between approximately 3.66 eV and
1.83 eV.
Determine the energies, in eV, of photons in the visible spectrum that are produced by
transitions between the energy levels shown in Fig. 7.1.
photon energies .................................................................................... eV [2]

PA GE 17
7 Electrons, travelling at speed v in a vacuum, are incident on a very thin carbon film, as For
illustrated in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
fluorescent
thin carbon screen
film
electron,
speed v
Fig. 7.1
The emergent electrons are incident on a fluorescent screen.

A series of concentric rings is observed on the screen.
(a) Suggest why the observed rings provide evidence for the wave nature of particles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The initial speed of the electrons is increased. State and explain the effect, if any, on the
radii of the rings observed on the screen.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2013 9702/41/O/N/13
PA GE 18
15
(c) A proton and an electron are each accelerated from rest through the same potential For
difference. Examiner’s
Determine the ratio Use
de Broglie wavelength of the proton

.
de Broglie wavelength of the electron
ratio = .................................................. [4]

PA GE 19

15
8 Light of wavelength 590 nm is incident normally on a surface, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.
light surface
wavelength 590 nm
Fig. 8.1
The power of the light is 3.2 mW. The light is completely absorbed by the surface.
(a) Calculate the number of photons incident on the surface in 1.0 s.
number = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Use your answer in (a) to determine
(i) the total momentum of the photons arriving at the surface in 1.0 s,
momentum = ........................................... kg m s−1 [3]
(ii) the force exerted on the surface by the light.
force = ..................................................... N [1]


PA GE 20

18
9 For a particular metal surface, it is observed that there is a minimum frequency of light below
which photoelectric emission does not occur. This observation provides evidence for a particulate
nature of electromagnetic radiation.
(a) State three further observations from photoelectric emission that provide evidence for a
particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Some data for the variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic energy EMAX of electrons
emitted from a metal surface are shown in Fig. 9.1.
0.6
0.5
E MAX
/ eV
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5
f / 1014 Hz
Fig. 9.1
(i) Explain why emitted electrons may have kinetic energy less than the maximum at any
particular frequency.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

PA GE 21
19
(ii) Use Fig. 9.1 to determine
1. the threshold frequency,
threshold frequency = ................................................... Hz [1]
2. the work function energy, in eV, of the metal surface.
work function energy = ................................................... eV [3]

21
(c) One possible fission reaction is
235U + 1n 141Ba + 92Kr + 3 10n .

92 0 56 36
By reference to binding energy, explain, without any calculation, why this fission reaction is
energetically possible.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

PA GE 22

18
8 White light is incident on a cloud of cool hydrogen gas, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.
cool
hydrogen gas
incident emergent
white light light
Fig. 8.1
The spectrum of the light emerging from the gas cloud is found to contain a number of dark lines.
(a) Explain why these dark lines occur.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Some electron energy levels in a hydrogen atom are illustrated in Fig. 8.2.
–0.38
–0.55
–0.85
–1.51
energy
/ eV
–3.41
Fig. 8.2
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/O/N/14

PA GE 23
19
One dark line is observed at a wavelength of 435 nm.
(i) Calculate the energy, in eV, of a photon of light of wavelength 435 nm.
energy = ................................................... eV [4]
(ii) On Fig. 8.2, draw an arrow to indicate the energy change that gives rise to this dark line.
[1]

PA GE 24
8 (a) State what is meant by a photon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A beam of light is incident normally on a metal surface, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.
light beam
metal surface
area of cross-section
1.3 × 10–5 m2
Fig. 8.1
The beam of light has cross-sectional area 1.3 × 10−5 m2 and power 2.7 × 10−3 W.
The light has wavelength 570 nm.
The light energy is absorbed by the metal and no light is reflected.
(i) Show that a photon of this light has an energy of 3.5 × 10−19 J.
[1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/O/N/14

PA GE 25
19
(ii) Calculate, for a time of 1.0 s,
1. the number of photons incident on the surface,
number = ........................................................ [2]
2. the change in momentum of the photons.
change in momentum = ........................................... kg m s−1 [3]
(c) Use your answer in (b)(ii) to calculate the pressure that the light exerts on the metal surface.
pressure = ................................................... Pa [2]

PA GE 26
8 A photon of wavelength 6.50 × 10−12 m is incident on an isolated stationary electron, as illustrated

in Fig. 8.1.
deflected photon
wavelength 6.84 × 10–12 m
incident photon
wavelength 6.50 × 10–12 m

electron
mass me
Fig. 8.1
The photon is deflected elastically by the electron of mass me. The wavelength of the deflected
photon is 6.84 × 10−12 m.
(a) Calculate, for the incident photon,
(i) its momentum,
momentum = .................................................. N s [2]
(ii) its energy.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

PA GE 27
17
(b) The angle θ through which the photon is deflected is given by the expression
h
Δλ = (1 – cos θ )
mec
where Δλ is the change in wavelength of the photon, h is the Planck constant and c is the
speed of light in free space.
(i) Calculate the angle θ.
θ = ...................................................... ° [2]
(ii) Use energy considerations to suggest why Δλ must always be positive.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

PA GE 28
12 Some of the electron energy bands in a solid are illustrated in Fig. 12.1.
conduction band
(partially filled)
forbidden band
valence band
Fig. 12.1
(a) In isolated atoms, electron energy levels have discrete values.

Suggest why, in a solid, there are energy bands, rather than discrete energy levels.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A light-dependent resistor (LDR) consists of an intrinsic semiconductor.
Use band theory to explain the dependence on light intensity of the resistance of the LDR
when it is at constant temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

PA GE 29

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Electrons are emitted from a metal surface when it is illuminated with suitable electromagnetic
radiation.
(a) Name the effect described above.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic energy Ek of the emitted electrons
is shown in Fig. 7.1.
–19
Ek / 10 J
0
0 4 8 12 16 20
14
f / 10 Hz
Fig. 7.1
Use Fig. 7.1 to determine
(i) the threshold frequency of the radiation,
threshold frequency = ........................................ Hz
(ii) a value for the Planck constant.
Planck constant = ........................................ J s

[4]
CEDAR COLLEGE 9702/4 M/J/02 PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

PA GE 30
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) On Fig. 7.1, draw a line to show the variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic
energy Ek of the emitted electrons for a second metal which has a lower work function
than that in (b). [2]
(d) The kinetic energy of the electrons is described as the maximum. Suggest why emitted
electrons are likely to have a range of values of kinetic energy for any one frequency of
the electromagnetic radiation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
9702/4 M/J/02

7 Page
coil in 4series with meter Mark
(do Scheme: Teachers’
not allow inclusion of version
a cell) Syllabus Paper
B1
(b) force
push known 2
due to
pole magnetic
GCE
into A
coil field
LEVEL –PA GE
provides 31
the centripetal
October/November force
2010 9702 B1
43
B1
mv / r = Bqv
observe current direction (not reading) 5 C1
B1
–27
5 (a) magnetic
B =field
(induced) (20flux = BA
/×field
1.66 × 10coil
from ×repels 10 ) / (1.6 × 10–19 × 6.4 × 10–2)
1.40 ×magnet B1
B1
–3 –2 –2
ANSWERS
either states = 0.454 T=to
rule 89determine
× 10 × 5.0 × 10 of
direction × magnetic
2.4 × 10 field in coil C1
A0 [3]
–4
or = 1.07 × 10 Wb
reversing magnet direction gives opposite deflection on meter A1
B1 [2]
direction of induced current such as to oppose the change producing it B1 [6]
(c) (i) semicircle with diameter greater than 12.8 cm B1 [1]
(b) (i) e.m.f. = ∆φ / ∆t C1
81 (a) wave (for ∆φ = 1.07 × 10 22
–4
Wb), ∆t = 2.4 × 10 –2
/ 1.8 = 1.33 × 10–2
s C1
theory predicts any
(ii) new flux density = –4 × 0.454 frequency would give rise to emission of electron M1
C1
20 –2
e.m.f. = (1.07 × 10 )
if exposure time is sufficiently long / (1.33 × 10 ) A1
= 8.0 ×B10
photon has (specific =–30.499
value V of) Tenergy dependent on frequency A1 [3]
A1
M1 [2]
emission if energy greater than threshold / work function / energy to remove
(ii) current
electron 8.0 × 10–3 / 0.12
from=surface M1
A1 [4]
6 (a) (i) e.g. prevent ≈ 70 flux
mA losses / improve flux linkage B1 [1]
A0 [1]
(b) (ii) fluxisinpacket/quantum

photon core is changing of energy B1
M1
of e.m.f. / currentradiation
electromagnetic (induced) in core B1
A1
(c) force on wire = BIL
induced–3 current in core causes heating B1 [3]
[3]
=(photon)
89 × 10energy × 70 ×=10h–3× ×frequency
5.0 × 10–2 B1
C1
–4
≈ 3 × 10 (N) M1
every particle has e.g.
an (associated) wavelength B1 [3]
(b) suitable
(i) thatcomment
wavelength value= hof/the this force is too / very small (to be felt)
p direct current producing same (mean) power / heating
A1
M1
M1
where in pa is
resistor
the momentum (of the particle) A1 [2]
A1 [3]
6 (a) power / heating
(ii) power depends
in primary = on I2 in secondary
power M1
M1
so independent VS IofS current
VP I/ P∆t= (ignore direction A1
A1 [2]
[2]
9 (a) (i) ∆N any sign) B1 [1]
2 (b) either
(i) ∆N
7 (a) (ii) e.g./maximum
N (ignore/ power
electron any sign)
particle I02R or average power = IRMS2R
= diffraction B1
M1
B1 [1]
[1]
I0 = √2 × IRMS M1
maximum
(ii) e.g.
(b) source power
must = 2by
decay × average
photoelectric effect power
8% B1
C1 [1]
ratio = 0.5
A = A exp(–ln2 t / T ) or A/ A = 1 / (2t/T) A1
C1 [3]
0 ½ 0
t/5.27
(b) 0.92
(i) 6= exp(–ln2 × t / 5.27) or 0.92 = 1 / (2 ) C1
A1 [1]
t = 0.634 years
7 (a) force due
230 to
= change E-field is equal and opposite to force due to B-field
days B1
A1 [4]
(ii)
Eq = Bqv in energy = 4.57 × 10–19 J B1
(allow 2 marks for A/ A0 = 0.08, answer 7010 days
= E/B
vallow λ = hc / E C1 [3]
B1
1 mark for A/ A0 = 0.12, answer 5880 days)
= (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108) / (4.57 × 10–19)
= 4.4 × 10–7 m A1 [2]
(b) either charge and mass are not involved © UCLES in2009
the equation in (a)
or FE and FB are both doubled
8 (a) orsplitting E,
of Ba heavy nucleus
and v do not change(not atom/nuclide) M1
M1
into two (lighter)
so no deviation nuclei of approximately same mass A1 [2]
A1 [2]
(b) 01n
83 (a) minimum
4 frequency for electron to be emitted (from surface) M1
2 He (allow 42 α ) M2
of electromagnetic radiation / light / photons A1 [2]
7
3 Li A1 [3]
(b) E = hc / λ or E = hf and c = fλ C1
(c) either
emitted particleswavelength
threshold (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108) / (5.8 × 10–19)
have kinetic= energy B1
range of particles in the control rods
= 340 nmis short / particles stopped in rods /
orloseenergy
kineticofenergy
340 nm rods = 4.4 × 10–19 J
in photon B1
orkinetic energyfrequency
threshold 8.7 × 1014 to
of particles= converted Hzthermal energy B1 [3]
14
or 450 nm → 6.7 × 10 Hz A1
appropriate comment comparing wavelengths / energies / frequencies B1
© UCLES 2010
so no effect on photo-electric current B1 [4]
© UCLES 2010
PA GE 32
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2 0 1 1 9 70 2 41
47 (a) for a wave, electron can ‘collect’ energy continuously B1
for a wave, electron will always be emitted /
electron will be emitted at all frequencies….. M1
after a sufficiently long delay A1 [3]

(b) (i) either GCE wavelength is longer
AS/A LEVEL than threshold wavelength
– October/November 2011 9702 41
or frequency is below the threshold frequency
6 (a) (i) period
or = photon
1/50 energy is less than work function B1C1 [1]
t1 = 0.03 s A1 [2]
(ii) hc / λ = φ + EMAX C1
(ii) peak × 10–34 =
(6.63voltage 17.0
× 3.0 ×V108) / (240 × 10–9) = φ + 4.44 × 10–19 C1A1 [1]
φ = 3.8 × 10 J (allow 3.9 × 10–19 J)
–19
A1 [3]
(iii) r.m.s. voltage = 17.0/√2
= 12.0 V A1 [1]
(c) (i) photon energy larger M1
(iv) mean voltage =kinetic
so (maximum) 0 energy is larger A1A1 [1]
[2]
(ii) fewer photons (per unit time) M1

= V 2/R
(b) powerso (maximum) current is smaller A1C1 [2]
= 122/2.4
= 60 W A1 [2]
8 (a) (i) Fe shown near peak A1 [1]
5 (a) each lineshown
represents
7 (ii) Zr about photon
half-wayof along
specific energy
plateau A1M1 [1]
photon emitted as a result of energy change of electron M1
specific
(iii) energyatchanges
H shown so0.4
less than discrete levels height
of maximum A1A1 [3]
[1]
(b) (i) arrow

(b) (i) heavyfrom –0.85
/ large eV level
nucleus to –1.5
breaks up /eV level
splits M1B1 [1]
into two nuclei / fragments of approximately equal mass A1 [2]
(ii) ∆E = hc /λ C1
–19
= (1.5
(ii) binding – 0.85)
energy × 1.6 × 10
of nucleus =B E × A B1C1
–19
= 1.04
binding × 10of
energy J
parent nucleus is less than sum of binding energies
= (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108)/(1.04 × 10–19)
λof fragments B1 [2]
= 1.9 × 10–6 m A1 [3]
(c) spectrum appears as continuous spectrum crossed by dark lines B1

two dark lines B1
electrons in gas absorb photons with energies equal to the excitation energies M1
light photons re-emitted in all directions A1 [4]
8 (a) (i) time for initial number of nuclei/activity M1

to reduce to one half of its initial value A1 [2]
(ii) λ = ln 2/(24.8 × 24 × 3600) M1

= 3.23 × 10–7 s–1 A0 [1]
(b) (i) A = λN C1
3.76 × 106 = 3.23 × 10–7 × N
N = 1.15 × 1013 A1 [2]
(ii) N = N0 e–λt
13
CEDAR COLLEGE = 1.15 ×©10 × exp(–{ln 2 × 30}/24.8)
University of Cambridge International Examinations
C1
2011 WORKBOOK
PHYSICS:
= 4.97 × 1012 A1 [2]
12 13 12
5 (a) (long) straight conductor carrying current of 1 A M1
current/wire normalMark PAfield
to magnetic GE 33 M1
Page 5 Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
(for flux density
GCE 1 T,)
AS/Aforce per unit
LEVEL length is 1 N m–1
– October/November 2011 9702 A1 43 [3]
6
7 (a) (i) packet/quantum of energy M1
(b) (i) (originally) downward
of electromagnetic force on magnet (due to current)
radiation B1 A1 [2]
by Newton’s third law (allow “N3”) M1
upward
(ii) minimum force on wire
energy to cause emission of an electron (from surface) A1 B1 [3]
[1]
(ii) F = BIL
(b) (i) 2.4
hc/λ×= 10Φ–3 +× E9.8
max
= B × 5.6 × 6.4 × 10–2 C1 M1
Bc =and
0.066 T (need 2 SF)
h explained A1 A1 [2]
[2]
(g missing scores 0/2, but g = 10 leading to 0.067T scores 1/2)
(ii) 1. either when 1/λ = 0, Φ = –Emax
or evidence of use of x-axis intercept from graph
(c) new reading or is 2.4√2 g
chooses point close to the line and substitutes values of 1/λC1
and
either changes between +3.4 g and –3.4
Emax into hc/λ = Φ + Emax g C1
or total
Φ change
= 4.0 × is 106.8
–19 g
J (allow ±0.2 × 10–19 J) A1 A1 [2]
[2]
2. either gradient of graph is 1/hc C1

6 (a) oil drop charged by friction/beta source24 24 B1
gradient = 4.80 × 10 → 5.06 × 10 M1
between parallel metal plates B1
h = 1/(gradient × 3.0 × 108)
plates are horizontal (1)
= 6.6 × 10–34 J s → 6.9 × 10–34 J s A1
adjustable potential difference/field between plates B1
chooses point close to the line and substitutes values of 1/λB1
or is stationary
until oil drop and
mg = q × V/d E max into hc/λ = Φ + Emax B1 (C1)
symbols explained values of 1/λ and Emax are correct within half a square(1) (M1)
oil drop viewed through × 10–34 J s → 6.9 × 10–34 J s
h = 6.6microscope (1) (A1) [3]
(Allow full credit for the correct use of any appropriate
m determined from terminal speed of drop (when p.d. is zero) method) (1)
(Do extras,
(any two not allow ‘circular’ calculations in part 2 that lead to the same value
1 each) B2 of [7]
Planck constant that was substituted in part 1)
(b) 3.2 × 10–19 C A1 [1]

8 (a) (i) probability of decay (of a nucleus) M1
per unit time A1 [2]
77 (a) minimum energy to remove an electron from the metal/surface B1 [1]
(ii) λt½ = ln 2
λ = ln 2/(3.82 × 24 × 3600) M1
–6 –1–15
(b) gradient = 4.17
= 2.1 × 10× 10
s (allow 4.1 → 4.3) C1 A0 [1]
h = 4.15 × 10 × 1.6 × 10–19
–15
or h = 4.1 to 4.3 × 10–15 eV s A1
–34
= 6.6 × 10 J s A0 [2]
(b) A = λN C1
200 = 2.1 × 10–6 × N C1
(c) graph: × 107 line parallel to given line
N = 9.5straight
ratio = with × 1025)/(9.5
(2.5 intercept at any 7
× 10higher
) frequency B1
17
2.6 × 10 at between 6.9 × 1014 Hz and 7.1 × 1014 Hz
= intercept B1 A1 [3]
[3]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
CEDAR COLLEGE 2011 WORKBOOK

PHYSICS:
© University of Cambridge International Examinations
or peak voltage across primary coil = 9.0 × √2 (C1)
peak voltage across load = 12.7 × (8100/300)
PA GE 34
Page 4 Mark Scheme 340 V
= Syllabus (A1)
Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 20 13 9 70 2 42
87 (a) loweste.m.f.
frequency of e.m. toradiation M1
6 (a) (i)
(induced) proportional rate M1
giving of
of change rise to emission
(magnetic) fluxof(linkage)
electrons (from the surface) A1
A1 [2]
[2]
(ii) E = hf C1
(b) (i) threshold frequency
positive terminal identified × 10–19connection
= (9.0(upper ) / (6.63 × 10 –34
)
to load) B1 [1]
15
= 1.4 × 10 Hz A1 [2]
(ii) VP = √2 × VRMS C1
ratio = 240 √2 / 9 C1
(b) eitherratio300 nm ≡ 10 × 1015 Hz (and 600 nm ≡ 5.0 × 1014 Hz)
= 38 A1 [3]
–19
or (VP =300 nm/ ≡√26.6
VRMS × 10ratio
gives J= 18.9
(and 600 nmscores
and × 10–19 J)
≡ 3.3 1/3)
or (ratiozinc
= 240
λ0 =/ 340
9 = 26.7 scores 1/3)
nm, platinum λ0 = 220 nm (and sodium λ0 = 520 nm) M1
(ratiofrom
emission = 9 /sodium
(240 / √2)
and=zinc
0.0265 is inverted ratio and scores 1/3) A1 [2]
(i) e.g.
(c) each
(c) (output)
photon p.d. / voltage
has larger energy / current does not fall to zero M1
fewere.g. rangeper
photons of (output)
unit timep.d. / voltage / current is reduced (any sensible answer) B1
M1 [1]
fewer electrons emitted per unit time A1 [3]
(ii) sketch: same peak value at start of discharge M1
correct shape between one peak and the next A1 [2]
97 (a) each wavelength is associated with a discrete change in energy M1

discrete energy change / difference implies discrete levels A1 [2]
© Cambridge International Examinations 2013
(b) (i) 1. arrow from –0.54 eV to –0.85 eV, labelled L B1 [1]
2. arrow from –0.54 eV to –3.4 eV , labelled S B1 [1]

(two correct arrows, but only one label – allow 2 marks)
(two correct arrows, but no labels – allow 1 mark)
(ii) E = hc / λ C1
(3.4 – 0.54) × 1.6 × 10–19 = (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108) / λ C1
λ = 4.35 × 10–7 m A1 [3]
(c) –1.50 → –3.4 = 1.9 eV

–0.85 → –3.4 = 2.55 eV (allow 2.6 eV)
–0.54 → –3.4 = 2.86 eV (allow 2.9 eV)
3 correct, 2 marks with –1 mark for each additional energy
2 correct, 1 mark but no marks if any additional energy differences B2 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE © Cambridge International Examinations 2013PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

(ii) sketch: curved path, constant radius, in direction towards bottom of
page M1
PA GE 35
tangent to curved path on entering and on leaving the field A1 [2]
10
7 (a)
Page 4 if light passes throughMark
either suitable film / cork dust etc.
Scheme Syllabus M1
Paper
either diffraction occurs and similar pattern
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 observed 9702 A1 42
or concentric circles are evidence of diffraction (M1)
(b) or(i) diffraction
m R Bqris / va wave property (A1)
C1 [2]
= = = R=(640 × 10–3 × 1.6 × 10–19 × 6.2 × 10–2) / (9.6 × 104 ) C1
= = = R=6.61 × 10–26 kg C1
= =(b) (speed
= increases
R=(6.61 so)
× 10 –26momentum increases
) / (1.66 × 10–27 ) u M1
= = λ = = h/p so λ
R=40 u decreases M1A1 [4]
hence radii decrease A1 [3]
(special case: wavelength decreases so radii decreases – scores 1/3)
or q / m ∝ 1 / r
(ii) or m constant and q ∝ 1 / r B1
(speedq/m increases so) energy
for A is twice that forincreases
B (B1)
B1
λ = hions
/ √(2Em)
in pathsoAλhave
decreases
(same mass but) twice the charge (of ions in path B) (M1)
B1 [3]
hence radii decrease (A1)
7 (a) angle subtended at the centre of a circle B1

electron
(c) by an arcand proton
equal have to
in length same (kinetic) energy
the radius C1B1 [2]
either E = p2 / 2m or p = √(2Em) C1
ratio = pe / pp = √(me / mp) C1
(b) ratio = √{(9.1
(i) arc × 10–31×) angle
R distance / (1.67 × 10–27)} C1
= 2.3 × 10R–2 3.8 × 105 × 9.7 × 10–6
ratiodiameter A1 [4]
= = = R 3.7 km A1 [2]
8 energy
(a) (ii) to is
Mars separate
(much) nucleons (in Earth
further from a nucleus)
/ away (answer must be comparative) M1B1
separate to infinity
angle (at telescope is much) smaller A1B1 [2]
[2]
(b) (i) fission B1 [1]
118 (a) photon energy R hc / λ
(ii) 1. U: near right-hand end of line B1 [1]
R (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108) / (590 × 10–9 ) C1
R 3.37 × 10–19 J C1
2. Mo: to right of peak, less than 1/3 distance from peak to U B1 [1]
–3
number
3. R (3.2
La: 100.6
0.4×→ ) /of
(3.37 × 10–19from
distance ) peak to U B1 [1]
= = = R 9.5 × 10 (allow 9.4 × 1015)
15
A1 [3]
(b) (i) p R h / λ C1
= = = R (6.63 × 10–34 ) / (590 × 10–9 )
= = = R 1.12 × 10–27 kg m s–1 C1
total momentum ©RCambridge

9.5 × 1015International
× 1.12 × 10Examinations
–27 2013
–11 –1
= = = R 1.06 × 10 kg m s A1 [3]
(ii) force R 1.06 × 10–11 N A1 [1]
9 (a) time for number of atoms / nuclei / activity (of the isotope) M1
to be reduced to one half (of its initial value) A1 [2]
(b) (i) A R λN C1
460 R N × ln 2 / (8.1 × 24 × 60 × 60) C1
N R 4.6 × 108 A1 [3]
(ii) number of water molecules in 1.0 kg R (6.02 × 1023) / (18 × 10–3) C1

R 3.3 × 1025
25 8
CEDAR COLLEGEratio R (3.3 × 10 ) / (4.6 × 10 ) PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
R 7.2 (7.3) × 1016 A1 [2]

(c) elementary charge = 1.6 × 10 C (allow 1.6 × 10 C to 1.7 × 10 C) M0
either the values are (approximately) multiples of this
or it is a common factor C1
it is the highest common factorPA GE 36 A1 [2]
129 (a) e.g. no time delay between illumination and emission

max. (kinetic) energy of electron dependent on frequency
max. (kinetic) energy of electron independent of intensity
rate of emission of electrons dependent on/proportional to intensity
(any three separate statements, one mark each, maximum 3) B3 [3]
(b) (i) (photon) interaction with electron may be below surface B1

Page 5 energy required to bring
Mark electron
Schemeto surface Syllabus Paper B1 [2]
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 20 14 9702 43
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
(ii) 1. Cambridge International
threshold frequency × 1014Level
= 5.8 AS/A Hz – October/November 2014 9702 A1 41 [1]
7 (a) (i) = hfheating

2. Φeither 0
effect in a resistor ∝ (current)2 C1 B1
square
= 6.63of ×
value
10–34of×an
5.8alternating
× 1014 current is always positive B1
so=heating effect
–19
3.84 × 10 (J) C1 A0
or=current
(3.84 moves in opposite
× 10–19)/(1.6 × 10–19directions
) in resistor during half-cycles (B1)
heating effect
= 2.4 eV is independent of direction A1(B1)
[3] [2]
(ii) orthat value of the direct current M1
producing the same heating effect (as the alternating current) in a resistor A1 [2]
hf = Φ + EMAX (C1)
chooses point on line and substitutes values EMAX, f and h into
(b) (i) induced e.m.f. proportional to the rate M1
equation with the units of the hf International
© Cambridge term converted from J to2014
Examinations eV (C1)
of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1 [2]
Φ = 2.4 eV (A1)
(ii) flux in core is in phase with current in the primary coil B1
(induced) e.m.f. in secondary because coil cuts the flux B1
10 (a) energy required to separate the nucleons (in a nucleus) M1
flux and rate of change of flux are not in phase B1 [3]
to infinity A1 [2]
(allow reverse statement)
13
8 (a) photon ‘absorbed’ by electron B1
photon has energy equal to difference in energy of two energy levels B1
(b) (i) ∆m = (2 × 1.00867) + 1.00728 – 3.01551 C1
electron de-excites emitting photon (of same energy) in any direction B1 [3]
= 9.11 × 10–3 u C1
binding energy = 9.11 × 10–3 × 930
(b) (i) E = hc / λ = 8.47 MeV A1 C1[3]
(allow 930 to 934 MeV so answer could be in range 8.47 to 8.51 MeV)
= (6.63 × 10–34 × 3 × 108) / (435 × 10–9) C1
(allow 2 s.f.) –19
= 4.57 × 10 J (allow 2 s.f.) C1
= (4.57 × 10–19) / (1.6 × 10–19) (eV)
(ii) ∆m = 211.70394 – 209.93722
= 2.86 eV (allow 2 s.f.) A1 [4]
= 1.76672 u C1
binding energy per nucleon = (1.76672 × 930)/210 C1
(ii) arrow pointing in either direction between –3.41 eV and –0.55 eV B1 [1]
= 7.82 MeV A1 [3]
(allownuclei
9 (a) ‘light’ 2 s.f.)combine to form ‘heavier’ nuclei B1 [1]
(c) total binding energy of barium and krypton M1

(b) (i) either energy = c2∆m
is greater than binding energy 8of2 uranium A1 [2]
or energy = (3.00 × 10 ) × 1.66 × 10–27 C1
energy = 1.494 × 10–10 J C1
= (1.494 × 10–10) / (1.60 × 10–13)
= 934 MeV (3 s.f.) Section B A1 [3]
11 (a) (i) (ii) ∆m =amplifier

inverting (2.01356 + 3.01551) – (4.00151 + 1.00867) B1 [1]
= 5.02907 – 5.01018
CEDAR COLLEGE
= 0.01889
(ii) gain is very u
large/infinite B1 C1
PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
+
V is earthed/zero B1
energy not
for amplifier = 0.01889 × 934P must be (almost) earth/zero
to saturate, B1 [3]
= 17.6 MeV (allow 2 s.f.) A1 [2]
B-field into the plane of the paper B1 [2]
(ii) sketch showing: deflection consistent with force in (b)(i) B1

PA GE 37
reasonable curve B1 [2]
14
8 (a) discrete amount / packet / quantum of energy M1
of electromagnetic radiation / EM radiation A1 [2]
(b) (i) E = hc / λ
= (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108) / (570 × 10–9) = 3.49 × 10–19 J A1 [1]
(ii) 1. Cambridge
number = International AS×/ A
(2.7 × 10–3) / (3.5 10Level
–19
) – May / June 2015 9702 C141
= 7.7 × 1015 A1 [2]
(b) (i) out of (plane of) paper/page (not “upwards”) B1 [1]
2. = momentum
(ii) B mv / qr of photon = h / λ C1
C1
–34 –9
= (3.32 × 10 × 7.6 × 10=
–26 4 (6.63 × 10–19 ) / (570 × 10
× 10–2) )
) / (1.6 × 10–27 × 6.1 –1 C1
= 0.26 T = 1.16 × 10 kg m s C1
A1 [3]
change in momentum = 1.16 × 10–27 × 7.7 × 1015
(c) sketch: semicircle with diameter =< 8.96
12.2 ×
cm10–12 kg m s–1 A1
B1 [3]
[1]
(allow E = pc route to 9 × 10–12)

7 (a) can change (output) voltage efficiently or to suit different consumers/appliances B1
by using transformers B1 [2]
(c) pressure = (change in momentum per second) / area C1
= (8.96 × 10–12) / (1.3 × 10–5)
(b) for same power, 10–7 Pais smaller
= 6.9 ×current A1
B1 [2]
less heating in cables/wires

14
9 (a) or thinner=cables
activity (1.7 × 10 ) / (2.5 × 106)
possible
7
or less voltage
= 6.8 ×loss
10 in kg–1
Bqcables B1
A1 [2]
[1]
158 (a)
(b) (i) penergy
= h / λreleased per second in 1.0 kg of steel
= (6.63 × 10–34=)6.8 × 10×710
/ (6.50 –12
) × 1.6 × 10–13
× 0.067 C1
–22 –7
= 1.02 × 10 =N7.3 s × 10 J A1
B1 [2]
[1]
(ii) E = hc / λ or E = pc
= (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.00 × 108 ) / (6.50 × 10–12) C1
= 3.06 × 10–14 J A1 [2]
(b) (i) 0.34 × 10–12 = (6.63 × 10–34 ) / (9.11 × 10–31 × 3.0 × 108 ) × (1 – cos θ) C1
θ = 30.7° A1 [2]
(ii) deflected electron has energy M1

this energy is derived from the incident photon A1
deflected photon has less energy, longer wavelength (so ∆λ always positive) B1 [3]
9 (a) nucleus/nuclei emits M1

spontaneously/randomly A1
α-particles, β-particles, γ-ray photons A1 [3]
(b) (i) N – ∆N A1 [1]
(ii) ∆N / ∆t A1 [1]
CEDAR COLLEGE
(iii) ∆N / N PHYSICS: WORKBOOKA1 [1]
(iv) ∆N / N∆t A1 [1]

energy = 0.532 × 450 × 30 × 10–3
= 3.8 J PA GE 38 A1 [2]
16 (a) (in a solid electrons in) neighbouring atoms are close together
12
(and influence/interact with each other) M1
this changes their electron energy levels M1
Page(many
7 atoms in lattice) cause a Mark
spread of energy levels into a band
Scheme Syllabus A1Paper
[3]
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9702 41
(b) photons of light give energy to electrons in valence band B1
electrons move into the conduction band M1
leaving holes in the valence band A1
these electrons and holes are charge carriers B1

increased number/increased current, hence reduced resistance B1 [5]
17 13 (a) e.g. background count (rate)/radiation
multiple possible counts from each decay
radiation emitted in all directions
dead-time of counter
(daughter) product unstable/also emits radiation
self-absorption of radiation in sample or absorption in air/detector window
three sensible suggestions, 1 each B3 [3]
(b) A = A0 exp(– ln 2 × t / T½)
1.21 × 102 = 3.62 × 104 exp(– ln2 × 42.0 / T½)

or
1.21 × 102 = 3.62 × 104 exp(–λ × 42.0) C1
T½ = 5.1 minutes (306 s) A1 [2]
(c) discrete energy levels (in nuclei) B1 [1]

PA GE 39
SENSORS 

17
PA GE 4 0
Section B For
Examiner’s
Answer all the questions in the spaces provided. Use
9 A metal wire strain gauge is firmly fixed across a crack in a wall, as shown in Fig. 9.1, so that
the growth of the crack may be monitored.
strain crack
gauge
Fig. 9.1
(a) Explain why, as the crack becomes wider, the resistance of the strain gauge increases.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The strain gauge has an initial resistance of 143.0 Ω and, after being fixed in position
across the crack for several weeks, the resistance is found to be 146.2 Ω.
The change in the area of cross-section of the strain gauge wire is negligible.
Calculate the percentage increase in the width of the crack. Explain your working.
increase = ........................................... % [3]

PA GE 41
10 (a) State the name of an electrical sensing device that will respond to changes in For
Examiner’s
(i) length, Use
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) pressure.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A relay is sometimes used as the output of a sensing circuit.
The output of a particular sensing circuit is either + 2 V or – 2 V.
On Fig. 10.1, draw symbols for a relay and any other necessary component so that the
external circuit is switched on only when the output from the sensing circuit is + 2 V.
+2 V or –2 V
output from terminals

sensing circuit of external
circuit
Fig. 10.1
[4]
© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10

20
PA GE 42
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 (a) Describe the structure of a metal wire strain gauge. You may draw a diagram if you
wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A strain gauge S is connected into the circuit of Fig. 9.1.
+4.5 V
RF
strain
gauge S
+9 V
R
–
R
+
–9 V
V1
VOUT
1.0 kΩ V2 RF
Fig. 9.1
The operational amplifier (op-amp) is ideal.

The output potential VOUT of the circuit is given by the expression
RF
VOUT = × (V2 – V1).
R
RF
(i) State the name given to the ratio
R.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

PA GE 43
21
(ii) The strain gauge S has resistance 125 Ω when not under strain. For
Calculate the magnitude of V1 such that, when the strain gauge S is not strained, Examiner’s
the output VOUT is zero. Use
V1 = ........................................... V [3]
(iii) In a particular test, the resistance of S increases to 128 Ω. V1 is unchanged.

R
The ratio F is 12.
R
Calculate the magnitude of VOUT .
VOUT = ........................................... V [2]

16
PA GE 4 4
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 An operational amplifier (op-amp) may be used as part of the processing unit in an electronic
sensor.
(a) State three properties of an ideal op-amp.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A comparator circuit incorporating an ideal op-amp is shown in Fig. 9.1.
+5 V
V1 VOUT
V2 –5 V
Fig. 9.1
(i) In one application of the comparator, V2 is kept constant at +1.5 V.

The variation with time t of the potential V1 is shown in Fig. 9.2. The potential V2 is
also shown.
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/O/N/12

PA GE 45
17
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8
potential
/V 6
2 V2
0
t
–2 V1
–4
–6
–8
–10
Fig. 9.2
On Fig. 9.2, show the variation with time t of the output potential VOUT . [4]
(ii) Two light-emitting diodes (LEDs) R and G are connected to the output of the
op-amp in Fig. 9.1 such that R emits light for a longer time than G.
On Fig. 9.1, draw the symbols for the two diodes connected to the output of the
op-amp and label the diodes R and G. [3]

17
PA GE 46
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 (a) Suggest electrical sensing devices, one in each case, that may be used to monitor
changes in
(i) light intensity,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the width of a crack in a welded joint,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) the intensity of an ultrasound beam.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

PA GE 47
18
(b) A student designs the circuit of Fig. 9.1 to detect changes in temperature in the range For
0 °C to 100 °C. Examiner’s
Use
+V
thermistor,
resistance RT
resistor,
constant resistance R VOUT
Fig. 9.1
The resistance of the thermistor is RT and that of the resistor is R.

The student monitors the potential difference VOUT.
State and explain
(i) whether VOUT increases or decreases as the temperature of the thermistor

increases,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) whether the change in VOUT varies linearly with the change in temperature of the
thermistor.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

18
PA GE 48
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 The volume of fuel in the fuel tank of a car is monitored using a sensing device. The device
gives a voltage output that is measured using a voltmeter. The variation of voltmeter reading
with the volume of fuel in the tank is shown in Fig. 9.1.
voltmeter 3
reading
/V 2
0
0 20 40 60 80
empty full
volume / litres
Fig. 9.1
(a) Use Fig. 9.1 to determine the range of volume over which the volume has a linear
relationship to the voltmeter reading.
from .................................. litres to .................................. litres [1]
(b) Suggest why, comparing values from Fig. 9.1,
(i) when the tank is nearly full, the voltmeter readings give the impression that fuel
consumption is low,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) when the voltmeter first indicates that the tank is nearly empty, there is more fuel
remaining than is expected.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

18
PA GE 49
Section B For
Examiner’s
#9 ,all
Answer the questions in the spaces provided. Use
7 Oct/Nov 2013 , Question qp_41
9 An electronic sensor may be represented by the block diagram of Fig. 9.1.
sensing processing output

device unit device
Fig. 9.1
(a) State the function of the processing unit.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A student designs a sensing unit for temperature change. A 4 V supply, a fixed resistor
of resistance 2.5 kΩ and a thermistor are available. The thermistor has resistance 3.0 kΩ
at 6 °C and resistance 1.8 kΩ at 20 °C.
Complete the circuit diagram of Fig. 9.2 to show how the resistor and the thermistor are
connected to provide an output that is greater than 2 V at 6 °C and less than 2 V at 20 °C.
Mark clearly the output VOUT.
+ 4V
Fig. 9.2
[3]
(c) Suggest two uses of a relay as part of an output device.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/O/N/13

Section B
PA GE 5 0
9 (a) (i) fraction of the output (signal) is added to the input (signal) M1
out of phase by 180° / π rad / to inverting input A1 [2]
Page 6
(ii) e.g. reduces ANSWERS
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version
gainLEVEL – October/November 2009
GCE A/AS 9702
Syllabus
41
Paper
increases bandwidth
greater stability Section B
reduces distortion
19 (any two,
(a) resistance 1 mark
of wire = ρLeach)
/ A ....................................................................................... B1 B2 [2]
as crack widens, L increases ....................................................................................M1
and A decreases ............................................................................M1
(b) (i) gain = 4.4 / 0.062 ............................................................................................. A0
so resistance increases [3]
= 71 A1 [1]
(b) ∆L / L = ∆R / R ........................................................................................................ B1
(ii) 71 = 1 + 120/R C1
= (146.2 – 143.0)
3 / 143.0 × 100 .................................................................. C1
∆L / LR == 2.24%
1.7 × 10 Ω
......................................................................................................... A1 [3] A1 [2]
[Total: 6]
(c) for the amplifier not to saturate B1
maximum output is (71 × 95 × 10–3 =) approximately 6.7 V M1
°C, V+should
10 at 16supply = 1.00 V
beand
– + –
+/–V9 =V 0.98 V or V > V ........................................................ B1 A1 [3]
at 16 °C, output is positive ................................................................................................M1
diode R is ‘on’ and diode G is ‘off’ .................................................................................... A1
2 (a)
10 as temperature
(i) strain rises,
gaugediode R goes ‘off’ and diode G goes ‘on’ ....................................... B1 [4] B1 [1]
(allow e.c.f. from 2nd to 3rd marks and also 3rd to 4th marks)
(ii) piezo-electric / quartz crystal / transducer [Total: 4]
B1 [1]
11 (b)
largecircuit: coil of field
/ 1 T magnetic relayapplied
connected along between
body (allow sensing
‘across’)circuit
(1) output and earth B1
switch
r.f. pulse applied across terminals of external circuit
............................................................................................................... (1) B1
causes hydrogen diode nuclei / protons
in series with .....................................................................................
coil with correct polarity for diode (1) B1
to resonate second
.......................................................................................................................
diode with correct polarity (1) B1 [4]
(nuclei) return to equilibrium state / after relaxation time ................................................. (1)
r.f. (pulse) emitted ............................................................................................................ (1)
Page detected,
pulses 5 Mark andScheme:
displayedTeachers’ version Syllabus (1) Paper
11 either quartz orprocessed
piezo-electric
GCE on AS/A crystal
LEVEL
......................................................................
– May/J une..................................................
2 011 9 7 02 B1
42
resonant frequency depends magnetic field strength (1)
opposite
calibratedfaces /two sides
non-uniform coated (with
field enables nucleisilver) to act as................................................
to be located electrodes (1) B1
eitherB molecular structure indicated
Section
any sixcentres
or of (+)
points, one and
mark (–) charge
each not coincident
.......................................................................................... B6 [6]B1
3
9 potential
(a) thin /difference
fine metalacross
wire crystal causes crystal to change shape B1 B1
alternating voltage (in US
lay-out shown as a grid frequency range) applied across crystal [Total:
B16]B1
causes crystal to oscillate
encased in plastic / vibrate B1 B1 [3]
(crystal cut) so that it vibrates at resonant frequency B1 [6]
(max 6)
(b) (i) gain (of amplifier) B1 [1]
(ii) for VOUT = 0, then V + = V – or V1 = V2 C1

V1 = (1000/1125) × 4.5 C1
V1 = 4.0 V A1 [3]
(iii) V2 = (1000 / 1128) × 4.5

= 3.99 V C1
VOUT = 12 × (3.99 – 4.00)
= (–) 0.12 V A1 [2]
10 strong / large (uniform) magnetic field © UCLES 2010 B1

nuclei precess / rotate about field direction (1)
radio frequency pulse © UCLES 2009 B1
at Larmor frequency (1)
causes resonance / nuclei absorb energy B1
CEDARon
COLLEGE
relaxation / de-excitation, nuclei emit r.f. pulse PHYSICS: WORKBOOK B1
pulse detected and processed (1)
non-uniform field superposed on uniform field B1
allows position of resonating nuclei to be determined B1
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 97 02 41
PA GE 51
Section B
49 (a) e.g. zero output impedance / resistance
infinite input impedance / resistance
infinite (open loop) gain
infinite bandwidth
Page 5
infinite slew rate Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
1 each, max. 3 GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2 013 97 02 4B3
1 [3]
8 (a) two (light) nuclei combine M1
(b) to
(i) form a more
graph: massive
square wavenucleus A1
M1 [2]
correct cross-over points where V2 = V1 A1
amplitude 5 V A1
(b) (i) correct
∆m = (2.01410
polarity u + 1.00728
(positive at t = 0)u) – 3.01605 u A1 [4]
–3
= 5.33 × 10 u C1
energy = c2 × ∆m
(ii) correct symbol for LED C1
M1
–3
= 5.33 × 10
diodes connected correctly × 10–27 ×VOUT
× 1.66between (3.00 × 10
and
8 2
)
earth A1
–13
= 8.0 ×consistent
correct polarity 10 J with graph in (i) A1
A1 [3]
[3]
(R points ‘down’ if (i) correct)
(ii) speed/kinetic energy of proton and deuterium must be very large B1
so that the nuclei can overcome electrostatic repulsion B1 [2]
10 X-ray images taken from different angles / X-rays directed from different angles B1
of one section / slice (1)
all images in the same plane Section B (1)
images combined to give image of section / slice B1
59 images
(a) (i) oflight-dependent resistor/LDR
successive sections / slices combined B1
B1 [1]
image formed using a computer B1
image strain is
(ii) formed gauge
3D image (1) B1 [1]
that can be rotated / viewed from different angles (1)
(four(iii) quartz/piezo-electric
B-marks crystal marks)
plus any two additional B1
B2 [1]
[6]
(i) resistance
(b) e.g.
11 (a) noise can be of thermistor
eliminated decreases as temperature
/ filtered / signal increses
can be regenerated M1
etiher V
extra bits can be = V × R / (R
OUTadded to check for + R )
T errors
or
multiplexing current increases and VOUT = I R
possible A1
VOUT
digital increases
circuits are more reliable / cheaper A1 [3]
data can be encrypted for security
(ii) either change
any sensible in RT 1with
advantages, each,temperature
max. 3 is non-linear B3 [3]
or VOUT is not proportional to RT/ change in VOUT with RT is non-linear M1
so change is non-linear A1 [2]
(b) (i) 1. higher frequencies can be reproduced B1 [1]
10 (a) sharpness: howchanges

2. smaller well theinedges (of structures)
loudness / amplitudeare
candefined
be detected B1
B1 [1]
contrast: difference in (degree of) blackening between structures B1 [2]
(ii) bit rate = 44.1 × 103 × 16 C1
= 7.06 × 105 s–1
(b) e.g. number
scattering= of × 106in×tissue/no
photos
7.06 340 use of a collimator/no use of lead grid
large penumbra 108shadow/large area anode/wide beam
= 2.4 × on A1 [2]
large pixel size
(any two sensible suggestions, 1 each) B2 [2]
12 (a) (i) signal in one wire (pair) is picked up by a neighbouring wire (pair) B1 [1]
(c) (ii) I = I0 eof–µxcoaxial cable is earthed

(i) outer C1
B1
ratio shields
outer = exp(–2.85 × 3.5)
the core / exp(–0.95
from × 8.0) signals
noise / external C1
B1 [2]
= (4.65 × 10–5 ) / (5.00 × 10–4 )
= 0.093 A1 [3]
(ii) either large difference (in intensities)

or ratio much less than 1.0 M1
CEDAR COLLEGEso good contrast PHYSICS: WORKBOOK A1 [2]
(answer given in (c)(ii) must be consistent with ratio given in (c)(i))

PA GE 52
Section B
69 (a) 30 litres → 54 litres (allow ± 4 litres on both limits)
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9702 A1 [1]
41
(b) (iii) right-hand

1. 0.1
(i) only V changeside, massfor
in reading = 235.922 u
10 litre consumption (or similar numbers) B1 C1
abovemass
aboutchange
60 litres=gradient
0.210 uis small compared to the gradient at about 40 litres A1 [2]
B1 [2]
2. energy = mc2 C1
(ii) voltmeter reading
energy (nearly)
= 0.210 × 1.66 10–27fuel
zero×when × 108)2
is left
× (3.0 C1
voltmeter reads only about
energy = 3.1374 × 10 J 0.1 V
–11 when 10 litres of fuel left in tank A1 [2]
C1
(“voltmeter reads zero when about 4 litres of fuel left in tank” scores 2 marks)
energy = 196 MeV (need 3 s.f.) A1 [3]
(use of 1 u = 934 MeV, allow 3/3; use of 1 u = 930 MeV or 932
10 (a) product ofMeV, allow
density and 2/3)
speed of sound / wave M1
(density of(use of 1.67
medium 10–27 of
and)×speed notsound
1.66/ ×10 –27
wave inscores
medium max. 2/3) A1 [2]
(b) if (Z1 – Z2) is small, mostly transmission

Section B M1
if (Z1 – Z2) is large, mostly reflection M1
(if ‘mostly’ not stated allow 1/2 marks for these first two marks)
97 operates on
(a) either / takes/signal
reflection from sensing
transmission device
also depends on (Z1 + Z2) B1
(so that) it intensity
or gives anreflection
voltage coefficient
output = (Z1 – Z2)2 / (Z1 + Z2)2 A1 B1
[3] [2]
(c) e.g.
(b) smaller and
thermistor structures caninbe
resistor distinguished
series between +4 V line and earth B1 M1
because better
VOUT shown resolution
clearly acrossat shorter
either wavelength
thermistor /or
higher frequency
resistor B1 [2]
A1
VOUT shown clearly across thermistor A1 [3]
11 (a) changing voltage changes energy / speed of electrons M1
changing electron energy changes maximum X-ray photon energy A1 [2]
(c) e.g. remote switching
e.g. switching large current by means of a small current
e.g. isolating
(b) (i) 1. loss ofcircuit
powerfrom high/ intensity
/ energy voltage B1 [1]
e.g. switching high voltage by means of a small voltage/current
(any2.twointensity
sensiblechanges when beam
suggestions, not parallel
1 each to max. 2) C1 B2 [2]
decreases when beam is divergent A1 [2]
ratio = (exp {–2.9 × 2.5}) / (exp {–0.95 × 6.0}) C1

10 (a) (ii)
pulse (of ultrasound) B1
= 0.21 (min. 2 sig. fig.) A1 [2]
produced
(valuesbyof quartz / piezo-electric
both lengths incorrect bycrystal (1) 1 mark)
factor of 10–2 to give ratio of 0.985 scores
reflected from boundaries (between media) B1
reflected pulse detected B1
by the ultrasound transmitter (1)
signal processed and displayed B1
intensity of reflected pulse gives information about the boundary (1)
time delay gives information about depth (1)
(four B marks plus any two from the four, max. 6) B2 [6]
(b) shorter wavelength B1

smaller structures resolved / detected (not more sharpness) B1 [2]
(c) (i) I = I0 e–µx C1

6.4 × 10–2
ratio = exp(–23©×Cambridge )
International Examinations 2013 C1
ratio = 0.23 A1 [3]
(ii) later signal has passed through greater thickness of medium M1

so has greater attenuation / greater absorption / smaller intensity A1 [2]

PA GE 53
COMMUNICATION

PA GE 54
AMPLIFICATION & ATTENTION

12 A signal is to be transmitted along a cable system of total length 125 km. For
The cable has an attenuation of 7 dB km–1. Amplifiers, each having a gain of 43 dB, are placed Examiner’s
at 6 km intervals along the cable, as illustrated in Fig. 12.1. Use
6 km 6 km amplifier 6 km
gain 43 dB
input output
signal signal
450 mW
125 km
Fig. 12.1
(a) State what is meant by the attenuation of a signal.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the total attenuation caused by the transmission of the signal along the cable,
attenuation = ......................................... dB [1]
(ii) the total signal gain as a result of amplification by all of the amplifiers along the
cable.
gain = ......................................... dB [1]
© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09

PA GE 55
21
(c) The input signal has a power of 450 mW. Use your answers in (b) to calculate the output For
power of the signal as it leaves the cable system. Examiner’s
Use
power = ....................................... mW [3]

PA GE 56
12 A ground station on Earth transmits a signal of frequency 14 GHz and power 18 kW towards For
a communications satellite orbiting the Earth, as illustrated in Fig. 12.1. Examiner’s
Use
ground station,
signal power
18 kW
ency
signal frequ
14 GHz
satellite
Earth
Fig. 12.1
The loss in signal power between the ground station and the satellite is 190 dB.
(a) Calculate the power of the signal received by the satellite.
power = .......................................... W [3]
(b) The signal received by the satellite is amplified and transmitted back to Earth.
(i) Suggest a frequency for the signal that is sent back to Earth.
frequency = ...................................... GHz [1]
(ii) Give a reason for your answer in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

PA GE 57
11 (a) Wire pairs provide one means of communication but they are subject to high levels of For
noise and attenuation. Examiner’s
Explain what is meant by Use
(i) noise,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) attenuation.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A microphone is connected to a receiver using a wire pair, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
wire pair
receiver
microphone
Fig. 11.1
The wire pair has an attenuation per unit length of 12 dB km–1. The noise power in the
wire pair is 3.4 × 10–9 W.
The microphone produces a signal power of 2.9 lW.
(i) Calculate the maximum length of the wire pair so that the minimum signal-to-noise
ratio is 24 dB.
length = ............................................ m [4]
(ii) Communication over distances greater than that calculated in (i) is required.
Suggest how the circuit of Fig. 11.1 may be modified so that the minimum
signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver is not reduced.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/O/N/10

PA GE 58
11 The use of ionospheric reflection of radio waves for long-distance communication has, to a For
great extent, been replaced by satellite communication. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State and explain two reasons why this change has occurred.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) The radio link between a geostationary satellite and Earth may be attenuated by as
much as 190 dB.
Suggest why, as a result of this attenuation, the uplink and downlink frequencies must
be different.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

PA GE 59
12 (a) The signal-to-noise ratio in an optic fibre must not fall below 24 dB. The average noise For
power in the fibre is 5.6 × 10–19 W. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Calculate the minimum effective signal power in the optic fibre.
power = ........................................... W [3]
(ii) The fibre has an attenuation per unit length of 1.9 dB km–1.
Calculate the maximum uninterrupted length of fibre for an input signal of power
3.5 mW.
length = ......................................... km [3]
(b) Suggest why infra-red radiation, rather than ultraviolet radiation, is used for long-distance
communication using optic fibres.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

PA GE 6 0
10 (a) Cable television uses optic fibres for the transmission of signals. For
Suggest four advantages of optic fibres over coaxial cables for the transmission of data. Examiner’s
Use
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
4. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Electromagnetic radiation of wavelength 1310 nm is frequently used for optic fibre
communication, rather than visible light.
(i) State the region of the electromagnetic spectrum in which radiation of wavelength
1310 nm is found.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest why this radiation is used, rather than visible light.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

PA GE 61
22
(c) An optic fibre has an attenuation per unit length of 0.2 dB km–1. For
A signal is transmitted along the optic fibre of length 30 km to a receiver. The noise Examiner’s
power at the receiver is 9.3 μW. Use
The minimum acceptable signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver is 26 dB.
Calculate
(i) the minimum signal power at the receiver,
power = ............................................ W [2]
(ii) the minimum input signal power to the optic fibre.
power = ..............................................W [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/O/N/11

PA GE 62
11 A signal that is transmitted over a long distance will be attenuated and it will pick up noise. For
Examiner’s
(a) State what is meant by Use
(i) attenuation,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) noise.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Explain why regenerator amplifiers do not amplify the noise that has been picked up on
digital signals.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A transmitter on Earth produces a signal of power 2.4 kW. This signal, when received by
a satellite, is attenuated by 195 dB.
Calculate the signal power received by the satellite.
power = ............................................. W [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

PA GE 63
12 (a) Wire pairs used for the transmission of telephone signals are subject to cross-linking. For
Examiner’s
(i) Explain what is meant by cross-linking. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest why cross-linking in coaxial cables is much less than in wire pairs.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A wire pair has a length of 1.4 km and is connected to a receiver, as illustrated in
Fig. 12.1.
wire pair
constant noise
power 3.8 × 10–8 W
input signal
receiver
power 3.0 × 10–3 W
1.4 km
Fig. 12.1
The constant noise power in the wire pair is 3.8 × 10–8 W.

For an input signal to the wire pair of 3.0 × 10–3 W, the signal-to-noise ratio at the
receiver is 25 dB.
Calculate the attenuation per unit length for the wire pair.
attenuation per unit length = ................................... dB km–1 [4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/O/N/12

PA GE 64
12 (a) Suggest applications, one in each case, for the transmission of signals using For
Examiner’s
(i) a wire pair, Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) a coaxial cable,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) a microwave link.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A cable used for the transmission of a signal has an attenuation per unit length of
2.1 dB km–1. There are no amplifiers along the cable.
The input power of the signal is 450 mW.
(i) Calculate the output power of the signal for the cable of length 40 km.
output power = ............................................ W [3]
(ii) The minimum acceptable signal power in the cable is 7.2 × 10–11 W.
Calculate the maximum uninterrupted length of the cable.
length = .......................................... km [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/O/N/12

PA GE 65
12 An optic fibre is used for the transmission of digital telephone signals. The power input to the For
optic fibre is 9.8 mW. The effective noise level in the receiver circuit is 0.36 μW, as illustrated Examiner’s
in Fig. 12.1. Use
85 km
receiver
input circuit,
9.8 mW
circuit optic fibre noise
0.36 W
Fig. 12.1
The signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver must not fall below 28 dB.
For this transmission without any repeater amplifiers, the maximum length of the optic fibre
is 85 km.
(a) Calculate the minimum input signal power to the receiver.
power = ............................................. W [2]
(b) Use your answer in (a) to calculate the attenuation in the fibre.
attenuation = ............................................ dB [2]
(c) Determine the attenuation per unit length of the fibre.
attenuation per unit length = ............................................ dB km–1 [1]

© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

PA GE 66
12 (a) Suggest why attenuation of a signal in channels of communication is usually measured For
on a logarithmic rather than a linear scale. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) For a particular channel of communication having low attenuation, the input power is
6.5 mW and the attenuation per unit length is 1.8 dB km–1.
(i) Suggest the name of this channel of communication.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Calculate the distance over which the power of the signal is reduced to
1.5 × 10–15 W.
distance = ........................................... km [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/O/N/13

PA GE 67

27
14 (a) State what is meant by the attenuation of a signal.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A transmission cable has a length of 30 km. The attenuation per unit length of the cable is
2.4 dB km−1.
Calculate, for a signal being transmitted along the cable,
(i) the total attenuation, in dB,
attenuation = ................................................... dB [1]
(ii) the ratio
input power of signal

.
output power of signal
ratio = ......................................................... [3]
(c) By reference to your answers in (b), suggest why the attenuation of transmitted signals is
usually expressed in dB.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

PA GE 68
12 (a) Information may be carried by means of various channels of communication.
Name examples, one in each case, of devices where information is carried to the device
using
(i) a wire pair,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) microwaves.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State two advantages of optic fibres as compared with coaxial cables for long-range
communication.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) An optic fibre has length 62 km and an attenuation per unit length of 0.21 dB km−1.
The input power to the fibre is P. At the receiver, the noise power is 9.2 μW.
The signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver is 25 dB.
(i) Calculate the ratio, in dB, of the input power P to the noise power at the receiver.
ratio = ................................................... dB [2]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to determine the input power P.
P = .................................................... W [2]

PA GE 69
ANALOGUE & DIGITAL

12 (a) Data may be transmitted as an analogue signal or as a digital signal. For

Examiner’s
(i) Explain what is meant by Use
1. an analogue signal,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. a digital signal.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) State two advantages of the transmission of data in digital form.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The block diagram of Fig. 12.1 represents a system for the digital transmission of
analogue data.
multi-channel cable
analogue
ADC DAC output
signal
Fig. 12.1
(i) Describe the function of the ADC (analogue-to-digital converter).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Suggest why the transmission cable has a number of channels.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES
CEDAR 2010
COLLEGE 9702/43/O/N/10 PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
PA GE 70
11 (a) In modern communications systems, the majority of data is transmitted in digital form For
rather than analogue form. Examiner’s
Suggest three advantages of the transmission of data in digital form. Use
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A recording is made of some music. For this recording, the music is sampled at a rate of
44.1 kHz and each sample consists of a 16-bit word.
(i) Suggest the effect on the quality of the recording of
1. sampling at a high frequency rather than a lower frequency,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. using a long word length rather than a shorter word length.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The recording lasts for a total time of 5 minutes 40 seconds.

Calculate the number of bits generated during the recording.
number = .................................................. [2]

PA GE 71

22
22
12 The digital transmission of speech may be represented by the block diagram of Fig. 12.1. For
Examiner’s
12 The digital transmission of speech may be represented by the block diagram of Fig. 12.1. For Use
parallel- serial- Examiner’s
Use
to- to-
ADC parallel- serial- DAC
serialto- parallel
to-
ADC converter converter DAC
serial parallel
converter converter
Fig. 12.1
Fig. 12.1
(a) State the purpose of the parallel-to-serial converter.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Part of the signal from the microphone is shown in Fig. 12.2.
16 16
14 14
12 12
10 10
microphone
microphone
output 8
output 8
/ mV / mV
6
6
4
4
2
2
0
0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0time / ms 1.2
time / ms
Fig. 12.2
Fig. 12.2
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

PA GE 72
23
The ADC (analogue-to-digital converter) samples the analogue signal at a frequency For
of 5.0 kHz. Examiner’s
Each sample from the ADC is a four-bit digital number where the smallest bit represents Use
1.0 mV.
The first sample is taken at time zero.
Use Fig. 12.2 to determine the four-bit digital number produced by the ADC at times
(i) 0.4 ms,
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) 0.8 ms.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The digital signal is transmitted and then converted to an analogue form by the DAC
(digital-to-analogue converter).
Using data from Fig. 12.2, draw, on the axes of Fig. 12.3, the output level of the
transmitted analogue signal for time zero to time 1.2 ms.
16
14
output
level 12
10
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / ms
[4]
Fig. 12.3
(d) State and explain the effect on the transmitted analogue waveform of increasing, for the
ADC and the DAC, both the sampling frequency and the number of bits in each sample.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

PA GE 73

21
11 The variation with time t of the output V produced by a microphone is shown in Fig. 11.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
16
14
V / mV
12
10
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
t / ms
Fig. 11.1
The output is processed by a four-bit analogue-to-digital converter (ADC) that samples the
output every 0.25 ms.
The first sample is taken at time t = 0 and is shown in Fig. 11.2.
0110
Fig. 11.2
(a) On Fig. 11.2, underline the most significant bit (MSB) of the sample shown. [1]
(b) Complete Fig. 11.2 for the next five samples. [2]
(c) Explain whether the sampling frequency is adequate to enable detail of the output V to
be reproduced.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

PA GE 74
13 The signal from a microphone is to be transmitted in digital form. A block diagram of part of the
transmission system is shown in Fig. 13.1.
parallel-to
ADC -serial
converter
Fig. 13.1
(a) Suggest two advantages of the transmission of a signal in digital form rather than in analogue
form.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State the function of the parallel-to-serial converter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) In a particular telephone system, the sampling frequency is 8 kHz. In the manufacture of a
compact disc, the sampling frequency is approximately 44 kHz.
Suggest and explain why the sampling frequency is much higher for the compact disc.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

PA GE 75
17
(c) The student repeats the experiment and determines the following values for the charge on oil
drops.
3.3 × 10−19 C 4.9 × 10−19 C 9.7 × 10−19 C 3.4 × 10−19 C
Use these values to suggest a value for the elementary charge. Explain your working.
elementary charge = ..................................................... C [2]

PA GE 76

26
12 (a) Distinguish between an analogue signal and a digital signal.
analogue signal: ........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
digital signal: .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An analogue-to-digital converter (ADC) converts whole decimal numbers between 0 and 23
into digital numbers.
State
(i) the minimum number of bits in each digital number,
number of bits = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) the digital number representing decimal 13.
........................................................... [1]
(c) An analogue signal is digitised before transmission. It is then converted back to an analogue
signal after reception.
State and explain the effect on the reproduction of the signal when the number of bits in the
analogue-to-digital converter (ADC) and the digital-to-analogue converter (DAC) is increased.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/O/N/14

PA GE 77

12
5 The variation with time t of the voltage level of part of an analogue signal is shown in Fig. 5.1.
16
14
voltage level 12
10
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
time t / ms
Fig. 5.1
The signal is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. Each sample is converted into a four-bit digital number.
Fig. 5.2 lists various times t at which the voltage level is sampled.
The digital number for time t = 0 is shown.
time t / ms 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
digital number 1011
Fig. 5.2
(a) (i) On Fig. 5.2, underline the most significant bit (MSB) for the digital number at time t = 0.
[1]
(ii) Complete Fig. 5.2 for the times shown. [2]
(b) After transmission of the digital numbers, the signal is passed through a digital-to-analogue
converter (DAC).
On Fig. 5.3, plot the transmitted analogue signal from the DAC.
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

PA GE 78
13
16
14
voltage level 12
10
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
time t / ms
Fig. 5.3
[3]
(c) The transmitted signal in (b) has less detail than the original signal in Fig. 5.1.
Suggest and explain two means by which the level of detail in the transmitted signal could be
increased.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 10]

PA GE 79
MODULATION
20
11 Many radio stations now broadcast on FM rather than on AM. In general, FM is broadcast at For
much higher frequencies than AM. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Explain what is meant by FM (frequency modulation).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State two advantages and two disadvantages of FM transmissions when compared with
AM transmissions.
advantages of FM transmissions
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
disadvantages of FM transmissions
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

PA GE 8 0
11 (a) Describe what is meant by frequency modulation (FM ). For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A sinusoidal carrier wave has a frequency of 600 kHz and an amplitude of 5.0 V.
The carrier wave is frequency modulated by a sinusoidal wave of frequency 7.0 kHz and
amplitude 2.0 V.
The frequency deviation of the carrier wave is 20 kHz V–1.
Determine, for the modulated carrier wave,
(i) the amplitude,
amplitude = .............................................. V [1]
(ii) the maximum frequency,
maximum frequency = ............................................ Hz [1]
(iii) the minimum frequency,
minimum frequency = ............................................ Hz [1]
(iv) the number of times per second that the frequency changes from maximum to
minimum and then back to maximum.
number = ................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

PA GE 81
11 In commercial radio, transmissions are made by means of carrier waves that are modulated For
by the audio signals. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State what is meant by a modulated carrier wave.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) State three reasons why modulated carrier waves are used, rather than the direct
transmission of electromagnetic waves having audio frequencies.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/O/N/12

PA GE 82
11 A radio station emits an amplitude-modulated wave for the transmission of music. For
Examiner’s
(a) (i) State what is meant by an amplitude-modulated (AM) wave. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Give two reasons why the transmitted wave is modulated, rather than transmitting
the information signal directly as a radio wave.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

PA GE 83
22
(b) The variation with frequency f of the amplitude A of the transmitted wave is shown in For
Fig. 11.1. Examiner’s
Use
0
900 909 918
f / kHz
Fig. 11.1
For this transmission, determine
(i) the wavelength of the carrier wave,
wavelength = ............................................. m [2]
(ii) the bandwidth,
bandwidth = .......................................... kHz [1]
(iii) the maximum frequency, in Hz, of the transmitted audio signal.
frequency = ............................................ Hz [1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

PA GE 84

10
5 The signal from a radio station is amplitude modulated.
(a) State what is meant by amplitude modulation (AM).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The variation with frequency of the intensity of the signal from the radio station is shown in
Fig. 5.1.
intensity
0
193 198 203
frequency / kHz
Fig. 5.1
State, for this signal,
(i) the bandwidth,
bandwidth = ................................................. kHz [1]
(ii) the maximum audio frequency that is broadcast.
maximum frequency = ................................................. kHz [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

PA GE 85
11
(c) A transmission line of length 45 km has an attenuation per unit length of 2.0 dB km−1.
The input power to the transmission line is 500 mW.

The minimum acceptable signal-to-noise ratio is 24 dB for background noise of 5.0 × 10−13 W.
(i) Calculate the minimum acceptable power output from the transmission line.
power = .................................................... W [2]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to determine whether it is possible to transmit the signal along the
transmission line.
[2]
[Total: 8]

PA GE 86
NETWORK
26
12 A block diagram representing part of a mobile phone network is shown in Fig. 12.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
X
Public
Switched
X Y Telephone
Network
mobile phone (PSTN)
X
handset
Fig. 12.1
(a) State what is represented by
(i) the blocks labelled X,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) the block labelled Y.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A user of a mobile phone is making a call.
Explain the role of the components in the boxes labelled X and Y during the call.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [5]

© UCLES 2009 9702/42/O/N/09
PA GE 87
11 A simplified block diagram of a mobile phone handset is shown in Fig. 11.1. For
Examiner’s
aerial Use
amplifier
r.f.
amplifier
modulator oscillator demodulator
parallel-to- serial-to-
serial parallel
C DAC
a.f.
amplifier D
microphone loudspeaker
Fig. 11.1
(a) Name and state the function of
(i) block A,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) block B,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

PA GE 88
24
(iii) block C, For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iv) block D.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Give two reasons why communication between a mobile phone handset and the base
station is conducted using UHF.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/O/N/11

PA GE 89
13 (a) In a mobile phone system, the area covered by the system is divided into a number of For
cells. Examiner’s
For this system, explain why Use
(i) neighbouring cells use different carrier frequencies,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) each cell has a limited area, even in sparsely populated regions.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A mobile phone handset is left switched on.

Explain why, although a call is not being made, the computer at the cellular exchange is
still operating for this phone.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

PA GE 9 0

22
22
12 The digital transmission of speech may be represented by the block diagram of Fig. 12.1. For
Examiner’s
12 The digital transmission of speech may be represented by the block diagram of Fig. 12.1. For Use
parallel- serial- Examiner’s
Use
to- to-
ADC parallel- serial- DAC
serialto- parallel
to-
ADC converter converter DAC
serial parallel
converter converter
Fig. 12.1
Fig. 12.1
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
16 16
14 14
12 12
10 10
microphone
microphone
output 8
output 8
/ mV / mV
6
6
4
4
2
2
0
0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0time / ms 1.2
time / ms
Fig. 12.2
Fig. 12.2
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

PA GE 91
23
The ADC (analogue-to-digital converter) samples the analogue signal at a frequency For
of 5.0 kHz. Examiner’s
Each sample from the ADC is a four-bit digital number where the smallest bit represents Use
1.0 mV.
The first sample is taken at time zero.
Use Fig. 12.2 to determine the four-bit digital number produced by the ADC at times
(i) 0.4 ms,
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) 0.8 ms.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The digital signal is transmitted and then converted to an analogue form by the DAC
(digital-to-analogue converter).
Using data from Fig. 12.2, draw, on the axes of Fig. 12.3, the output level of the
transmitted analogue signal for time zero to time 1.2 ms.
16
14
output
level 12
10
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / ms
[4]
Fig. 12.3
(d) State and explain the effect on the transmitted analogue waveform of increasing, for the
ADC and the DAC, both the sampling frequency and the number of bits in each sample.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

PA GE 92
12 A mobile phone handset is, at its simplest, a radio transmitter and receiver.
Outline the role of base stations and the cellular exchange when a mobile phone is switched on
and before a call is made.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

PA GE 93
SATELLITES
12 A ground station on Earth transmits a signal of frequency 14 GHz and power 18 kW towards For
a communications satellite orbiting the Earth, as illustrated in Fig. 12.1. Examiner’s
Use
ground station,
signal power
18 kW
ency
signal frequ
14 GHz
satellite
Earth
Fig. 12.1
The loss in signal power between the ground station and the satellite is 190 dB.
(a) Calculate the power of the signal received by the satellite.
power = .......................................... W [3]
(b) The signal received by the satellite is amplified and transmitted back to Earth.
(i) Suggest a frequency for the signal that is sent back to Earth.
frequency = ...................................... GHz [1]
(ii) Give a reason for your answer in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

PA GE 94
12 (a) Outline the principles of the use of a geostationary satellite for communication on For
Earth. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
Question 12 continues on the next page.

PA GE 95
24
(b) Polar-orbiting satellites are also used for communication on Earth. For
State and explain one advantage and one disadvantage of polar-orbiting satellites as Examiner’s
compared with geostationary satellites. Use
advantage: ......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage: ..................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/O/N/10

PA GE 96
11 The use of ionospheric reflection of radio waves for long-distance communication has, to a For
great extent, been replaced by satellite communication. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State and explain two reasons why this change has occurred.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) The radio link between a geostationary satellite and Earth may be attenuated by as
much as 190 dB.
Suggest why, as a result of this attenuation, the uplink and downlink frequencies must
be different.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

PA GE 97
TRANSMISSION
20
12 (a) State and explain two advantages of the transmission of information in digital, rather For
than analogue, form. Examiner’s
Use
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Convert
(i) the decimal number 13 to a four-bit digital number,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) the digital number 0101 to a decimal number.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) An analogue signal is to be transmitted digitally. A block diagram for part of the
block X block Y
parallel
analogue to transmission recovered
signal ADC serial analogue
converter signal
Fig. 12.1
(i) Complete Fig. 12.1 by labelling block X and block Y. [2]

(ii) State the purpose of the parallel-to-serial converter.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2009 9702/41/O/N/09

PA GE 98
21
(d) The original analogue signal is shown in Fig. 12.2. The recovered signal after transmission For
is shown in Fig. 12.3. Examiner’s
Use
signal recovered
signal
0 0
0 time 0 time
Fig. 12.2 Fig. 12.3
Suggest and explain two ways in which the reproduction of the input signal may be
improved.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2009 9702/41/O/N/09

PA GE 99

20
12 A telephone link between two towns is to be provided using an optic fibre. The length of the For
optic fibre between the two towns is 75 km. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State two changes that occur in a signal as it is transmitted along an optic fibre.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The optic fibre has an attenuation per unit length of 1.6 dB km–1. The minimum
permissible signal-to-noise power ratio in the fibre is 25 dB. The average noise power in
the optic fibre is 6.1 × 10–19 W.
(i) Suggest one reason why power ratios are expressed in dB.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The signal input power to the optic fibre is designed to be 6.5 mW.
Determine whether repeater amplifiers are necessary in the optic fibre between the
two towns.
[5]
© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10

PA GE 10 0

23
12 Many television receivers are connected to an aerial using a coaxial cable. Such a cable is For
illustrated in Fig. 12.1. Examiner’s
Use
copper
wire
polythene
plastic insulator
covering
copper
braid
Fig. 12.1
(a) State two functions of the copper braid.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Suggest two reasons why a coaxial cable is used, rather than a wire pair, to connect the
aerial to the receiver.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) A coaxial cable has an attenuation per unit length of 200 dB km–1.
The length of the co-axial cable between an aerial and the receiver is 12 m.
Calculate the ratio
input signal power to coaxial cable .

output signal power from coaxial cable
ratio = ................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

PA GE 101
10 (a) Cable television uses optic fibres for the transmission of signals. For
Suggest four advantages of optic fibres over coaxial cables for the transmission of data. Examiner’s
Use
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
4. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Electromagnetic radiation of wavelength 1310 nm is frequently used for optic fibre
communication, rather than visible light.
(i) State the region of the electromagnetic spectrum in which radiation of wavelength
1310 nm is found.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest why this radiation is used, rather than visible light.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

PA GE 102
22
(c) An optic fibre has an attenuation per unit length of 0.2 dB km–1. For
A signal is transmitted along the optic fibre of length 30 km to a receiver. The noise Examiner’s
power at the receiver is 9.3 μW. Use
The minimum acceptable signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver is 26 dB.
Calculate
(i) the minimum signal power at the receiver,
power = ............................................ W [2]
(ii) the minimum input signal power to the optic fibre.
power = ..............................................W [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/O/N/11

PA GE 103
12 (a) Wire pairs used for the transmission of telephone signals are subject to cross-linking. For
Examiner’s
(i) Explain what is meant by cross-linking. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest why cross-linking in coaxial cables is much less than in wire pairs.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A wire pair has a length of 1.4 km and is connected to a receiver, as illustrated in
Fig. 12.1.
wire pair
constant noise
power 3.8 × 10–8 W
input signal
receiver
power 3.0 × 10–3 W
1.4 km
Fig. 12.1
The constant noise power in the wire pair is 3.8 × 10–8 W.

For an input signal to the wire pair of 3.0 × 10–3 W, the signal-to-noise ratio at the
receiver is 25 dB.
Calculate the attenuation per unit length for the wire pair.
attenuation per unit length = ................................... dB km–1 [4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/O/N/12

PA GE 10 4
12 (a) Suggest applications, one in each case, for the transmission of signals using For
Examiner’s
(i) a wire pair, Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) a microwave link.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A cable used for the transmission of a signal has an attenuation per unit length of
2.1 dB km–1. There are no amplifiers along the cable.
The input power of the signal is 450 mW.
(i) Calculate the output power of the signal for the cable of length 40 km.
output power = ............................................ W [3]
(ii) The minimum acceptable signal power in the cable is 7.2 × 10–11 W.
Calculate the maximum uninterrupted length of the cable.
length = .......................................... km [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/O/N/12

PA GE 10 5

26
13 The signal from a microphone is to be transmitted in digital form. A block diagram of part of the
parallel-to
ADC -serial
converter
Fig. 13.1
(a) Suggest two advantages of the transmission of a signal in digital form rather than in analogue
form.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State the function of the parallel-to-serial converter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) In a particular telephone system, the sampling frequency is 8 kHz. In the manufacture of a
compact disc, the sampling frequency is approximately 44 kHz.
Suggest and explain why the sampling frequency is much higher for the compact disc.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

PA GE 10 6

22
12 Two people, living in different regions of the Earth, communicate either using a link provided by a
geostationary satellite or using optic fibres.
(a) (i) Explain what is meant by a geostationary satellite.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The uplink frequency for communication with the satellite is 6 GHz and the downlink has
a frequency of 4 GHz.
Explain why the frequencies are different.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Comment on the time delays experienced by the two people when communicating either
using geostationary satellites or using optic fibres. Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

PA GE 107
12 (a) Information may be carried by different channels of communication.
State one application, in each case, where information is carried using
(i) microwaves,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) coaxial cables,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) wire pairs.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A station on Earth transmits a signal of initial power 3.1 kW to a geostationary satellite.
The attenuation of the signal received by the satellite is 190 dB.
(i) Calculate the power of the signal received by the satellite.
power = .................................................. kW [2]
(ii) By reference to your answer in (i), state and explain the changes made to the signal
before transmission back to Earth.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/O/N/14

PA GE 10 8

22
11 One channel of communication is by the use of a coaxial cable. Such a cable is illustrated in
Fig. 11.1.
protective
covering
inner copper
wire
plastic insulation A
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i) Suggest the material from which the component labelled A on Fig. 11.1 is made.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest two functions of the component labelled A.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) When a signal travels along the coaxial cable, it is attenuated.
(i) State the meaning of attenuation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain why attenuation is frequently measured in decibels (dB).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

PA GE 10 9
23
(c) A television aerial is connected to a receiver using a coaxial cable of length 11 m. The
attenuation per unit length of the cable is 190 dB km–1.
Calculate the ratio

output signal from coaxial cable
.
input signal to coaxial cable
ratio = ...........................................................[3]
Please turn over for Question 12.

image
(ii) can be viewed
fraction from different angles / rotated
= exp(–µx) B1
C1
= exp(–23 × 4.1 × 10–2 ) max 6 [6]
GCE=AS/A
0.39 LEVEL – October/November 2010 9702 41
A1 [2]
PA GE 110
Section B
(b) (iii)
(i) intensity
16 = 0.33 × 0.392 × I A1
C1 [1]
ANSWERS
9 (a) (i) non-inverting = (amplifier)
0.050 I A1
B1 [2]
[1]
(ii) (do not allow e.c.f. from16(i)then
evidence of deducting and dividing by 3answers are greater than 1)
(ii) if these C1
to give A1 [2]
(ii) (G =) 1 + R2 / R1 B1 [1]
3 2
1 (a)
12 loss / 6reduction
5 in power / energy / voltage/ amplitude (of the signal) B1 [1]
(b) (i) gain = 1 + 100 / 820 C1
output = 17 mV A1 [2]
11 (b)
(a) (i) attenuation
frequency = 125
of carrier wave × 7varies
= 875 (indB
synchrony) with signal A1
M1 [1]
(ii) 9 V
(in synchrony) with displacement of signal A1
A1 [1]
[2]
(ii) (R
202amplifiers
/ R1 scores 0 in (a)(ii) but possible 1 mark in each of (b)(i) and (b)(ii)
(1 + R=1 /20
gain R2)×scores
43 = 860 0 in dB
(a)(ii), no mark in (b)(i), possible 1 mark in (b)(ii) A1 [1]
(b) (1 – R2 /e.g.
advantages R1) or less R1 / noise
R2 scores
/ less0 interference
in (a)(ii), (b)(i) and (b)(ii))
greater bandwidth / better quality
(c) gain = 10
(1 each, maxlg(P2)1 /P2 ) C1
10 (a) overall gain ×=speed
(i) density
disadvantages –15 dB
e.g. of /wave
short attenuation
(in the
range / moreis 15
medium) dB
transmitters / line of sight C1
B1 [1]
–15 = 10 lg(P / 450)more complex circuitry
P = ρ14=mW
(ii) (7.0 × 106) /greater
4100 expense A1 [3]
–3
= 1700
(1 each, max 2) kg m A1
B4 [1]
[4]
2
12 (b)
(a) (i)
gainI/ =loss/dB
IT + IR = 10 lg(P1/P2) B1
C1 [1]
190 = 10 lg(18 × 1036 /2 P2)
(ii) 1. α ==10 (0.1 × 10 ) / (3.13 × 106)2 C1
or –190 lg P 2 / 18 × 10 ) © UCLES 2009 C1
power = 1.8 = 0.001
× 10–15 W A1
A1 [2]
[3]
2. α ≈ 1 A1 [1]
(b) (i) 11 GHz / 12 GHz B1 [1]
(c) either very little transmission at an air-skin boundary M1
(ii) e.g. so that input signal to satellite will not be ‘swamped’
(almost) complete transmission at a gel-skin boundary M1
to avoid interference of uplink with / by downlink B1 [1]
when wave travels in or out of the body A1 [3]
or no gel, majority reflection (M1)
with gel, little reflection (M1)
when wave travels in or out of the body (A1)
3 (a) (i) unwanted random power / signal / energy

11 B1 [1]
(ii) loss of (signal) power / energy B1 [1]
(b) (i) either signal-to-noise ratio at mic. = 10 lg (P2 / P1) C1

= 10 lg ({2.9 × 10–6} / {3.4 × 10–9})
= 29 dB A1
maximum length = (29 – 24) / 12 C1
= 0.42 km = 420 m A1 [4]
© UCLES 2010
or signal-to-noise ratio at receiver = 10 lg (P2 / P1) (C1)
at receiver, 24 = 10 lg(P / {3.4 × 10–9})
P = 8.54 × 10–7 W (A1)
power loss in cables = 10 lg({2.9 × 10–6} / {8.54 × 10–7}) (C1)
= 5.3 dB
length = 5.3 / 12 km
= 440 m (A1)
© UCLES 2010

radio frequency pulse B1
at Larmor frequency PA GE 111 version (1)
Page 6 resonance /Mark
causes nucleiScheme: Teachers’
absorb energy Syllabus Paper
B1
on relaxation GCE AS/A LEVEL
/ de-excitation, – October/November
nuclei emit r.f. pulse 2010 9702 41
B1
(ii) use an field
non-uniform amplifier
superposed on uniform field M1
B1
allows positiontoofthe
coupled microphone
resonating nuclei to be determined A1
B1 [2]
(repeater amplifiers scores
allows for location of detection tono
bemark)
changed (1)
(six points, 1 each plus any two extra – max 8) [8]
12 (a) (carrier wave) transmitted from Earth to satellite (1)

4 (a)
11 satellite receives greatly
e.g. unreliable attenuated signal
communication (1)
(M1)
signal amplified and transmitted
because ion layers vary in back to Earth
height / density (A1) B1
at ae.g.
different (carrier) frequency
cannot carry all information required (M1) B1
differentbandwidth
frequencies
tooprevent
narrowswamping of uplink signal (1)
(A1)
e.g.e.g.
of frequencies used (6/4 GHz, 14/11 GHz, 30/20 GHz)
coverage limited (1)
(M1)
(two B1reception
marks plus anyintwo
poor hillyother
areasfor additional physics) (A1) B2 [4]
(any two sensible suggestions, M1 & A1 for each, max 4) [4]
(b) advantage: e.g. much shorter time delay M1

because
(b) signal must be amplified orbits before
(greatly) are much lower
transmission back to Earth A1
B1
uplink signal e.g.
wouldwhole Earth may
be swamped be covered
by downlink signal (M1)B1 [2]
in several orbits / with network (A1)
disadvantage:
Page 6 e.g. Mark must be Teachers’
eitherScheme: tracked version Syllabus Paper
or AS/A
GCE limited
LEVELuse–inMay/J
any one
uneorbit
20 11 9702 M1 4 2
more satellites required for continuous operation A1 [4]
5 (a) (i) ratio / dB = 10 lg(P1 / P2)
12 C1
24 = 10 lg(P1 / {5.6 × 10–19}) C1
–16
P1 = 1.4 × 10 W A1 [3]
(ii) attenuation per unit length = 1 / L × 10 lg(P1 / P2) C1

1.9 = 1 / L × 10 lg({3.5 × 10–3}/{1.4 × 10–16}) C1
L = 1 km A1 [3]
or
attenuation = 10 lg({3.5 × 10–3}/{5.6 × 10–19}) (C1)
= 158 dB
attenuation©along fibreof= Cambridge
University (158 – 24)International Examinations
(C1)
2011
L = (158 – 24) / 1.9 = 71 km (A1)
(b) less attenuation (per unit length) / longer uninterrupted length of fibre B1 [1]

© UCLES 2010
eitherfour,relay
(d) (any can be
one mark used to switch a large current/voltage
each) B4 M1 [4]
output current of op-amp is a few mA/very small A1 [2]
or relay can be used as a remote switch (M1)
for inhospitable PA GE 112 using long heavy cables
region/avoids (A1)
(b) graph: square wave M1
180° phase change A1
amplitude 5.0 V A1 [3]
610 (a) e.g. large bandwidth/carries more information
low attenuation of signal
(c) correctlow cost for LED
symbol M1
smaller
diodes connecteddiameter, easier
correctly handling,
between easier
VOUT storage, less weight
and earth A1
diodeshigh security/no
identified crosstalk
correctly A1 [3]
(special case: if diode interference
low noise/no EM symbol, not LED symbol, allow 2 nd and 3 rd marks to be scored)
(allow any four sensible suggestions, 1 each, max 4) B4 [4]
10 (a) e.g. beam is divergent/obeys inverse square law

infra-red (in block)
(b) (i) absorption B1 [1]
scattering (of beam in block)
lower attenuation
(ii) reflection than for visible light
(at boundaries) B1 [1]
(c) (i) gain/dB = 10 lg(P2/P1) C1

(b) (i) 26 I == I10 lg(P2/9.3 × 10–6)
0 exp(–µx) C1
–3
IP 2 = 3.7 × 10 W A1 [2]
0 /I = exp(0.27 × 2.4)
= 1.9 A1 [2]
(ii) power loss along fibre = 30 × 0.2 = 6.0 dB C1
(ii) Ieither 6 = 10 lg(P/3.7 × 10–3) or 6 dB = 4 × 3.7 × 10–3
0 /I = exp(0.27 × 1.3) × exp(3.0 × 1.1) C1
or = 1.42 10 lg(P/9.3 × 10–6)
32 ×= 27.1
–2
input= power
38.5 = 1.5 × 10 W A1 A1 [2]
[2]
(c) either much greater absorption in bone than in soft tissue

or Io / I much greater for bone than soft tissue B1 [1]
7 (a) (i) loss of (signal) power

11 B1 [1]
(ii) unwanted power (on signal) M1

that is random A1 [2]
(b) for digital, only the ‘high’ and the ‘low’ / 1 and 0 are necessary M1
variation between ‘highs’ and ‘lows’ caused by noise not required A1 [2]
(c) attenuation = 10 lg(P2 / P1) C1

either 195 = 10 lg({2.4 × 103 } / P)
or –195 = 10 lg(P / 2.4 × 103 ) C1
P = 7.6 × 10–17 W A1 [3]

= 7.06 × 105 s–1
number = 7.06 × 106 × 340
= 2.4 × 108 PA GE 113 A1 [2]
8 (a) (i) signal in one wire (pair) is picked up by a neighbouring wire (pair)
12 B1 [1]
(ii) outer of coaxial cable is earthed B1

Page 6outer shields the core from Mark Scheme
noise / external signals Syllabus Paper
B1 [2]
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/Nov ember 2 0 1 2 9702 41
(b) attenuation per unit length = 1/L × 10 lg(P2/P1) C1

signal power at receiver = 102.5 ×International
© Cambridge 3.8 × 10–8 Examinations 2012
= 1.2 × 10–5 W C1
attenuation in wire pair = 10 lg({3.0 × 10–3} / {1.2 × 10–5})
= 24 dB C1
Pageattenuation
6 per unit length =Mark
24 / 1.4
Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL = 17–dB km–1
October/November 2012 9702 A1
43 [4]
(other correct methods of calculation are possible)
(b) e.g. shorter aerial required
longer transmission range / lower transmitter power / less attenuation
allows more than one station in a region
less distortion
(allow any three sensible suggestions, 1 mark each) B3 [3]
9
12 (a) (i) e.g. linking a (land) telephone to the (local) exchange B1 [1]
(ii) e.g. connecting an aerial to a television B1 [1]
(iii) e.g. linking a ground station to a satellite B1 [1]
(b) (i) attenuation = 10 lg (P2 / P1) C1

total attenuation = 2.1 × 40 (= 84 dB) C1
84 = 10 lg ({450 × 10–3 } / P)
P = 1.8 × 10–9 W A1 [3]
(answer 1.1 ×108 W scores 1 mark only)
(ii) maximum attenuation = 10 lg ({450 × 10–3 } / {7.2 × 10–11})

= 98 dB C1
maximum length = 98/2.1
= 47 km A1 [2]

(ii) bandwidth = 18 kHz A1 [1]
(iii) frequency = 9000 Hz PA GE 114 A1 [1]
10
12 (a) for received signal, 28 = 10 lg(P / {0.36 × 10–6}) C1
P = 2.3 × 10–4 W A1 [2]
Page 6 in fibre = 10 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

(b) loss lg({9.8 × 10–3} / {2.27 × 10–4}) C1
GCE A
= 16 dB LEVEL – October/November 2013 9702 41
A1 [2]
11 (a) left-hand bit underlined B1 [1]
(c) attenuation per unit length = 16 / 85
= 0.19 dB km–1 A1 [1]
(b) 1010, 1110, 1111, 1010, 1001
(5 correct scores 2, 4 correct scores 1) A2 [2]
(c) significant changes in detail of V between samplings M1

so frequency too low A1 [2]
11 (a) e.g. logarithm provides a smaller number

12
e.g. gain of amplifiers is series found by addition, (not multiplication)
(any sensible suggestion) B1 [1]
(b) (i) optic fibre B1 [1]
(ii) attenuation/dB = 10 lg(P2/P1) C1

attenuation/dB = 10 lg({6.5 × 10–3}/{1.5 × 10–15}) C1
attenuation/dB = 126
length = 126 / 1.8
length = 70 km A1 [3]

+ frequencies
or (forlower
(ii) VIN > (range
1.0 V) Vof)> V– on phone A1
B1
either higher quality (of sound) on disc
output (of op-amp) is +5 V or positive M1
high quality (of sound) PA GE 115
or diode conducts giving +5 Vnot required
across R orfor
Voutphone
is +5 V B1
A1 [3]
(for VIN < 1.0 V) output of op-amp –5 V / negative so diode does not conduct,
12
14 (a) reduction
givinginVout
power (allow Rintensity/amplitude)
= 0 or 0 V across B1
A1 [1]
[4]
(b) (i) square wave with maximum value +5 V and minimum value 0 M1
(b) (i) vertical
attenuation
sides= in
2.4correct
× 30 positions and correct phase A1 [2]
= 72 dB A1 [1]
(ii) re-shaping (digital) signals/regenerator (amplifier) B1 [1]
(ii) gain/attenuation/dB = 10 lg(P2/P1) C1
72 = 10 lg(PIN/POUT) or –72 = 10 lg(POUT /PIN) C1
7
ratio = 1.6 × 10
11 (a) change/increase/decrease anode/tube voltage A1
B1 [3]
electrons striking anode have changed (kinetic) energy/speed B1
X-ray/photons/beam have different wavelength/frequency B1 [3]
(c) e.g. enables smaller/more manageable numbers to be used
e.g. gains in dB for series amplifiers are added, not multiplied B1 [1]
(b) (i) I = I0 e–µx B1 [1]
(ii) contrast is difference in degree of blackening (of regions of the image) B1

µ (very) similar so similar absorption of radiation (for same thickness) so little
contrast A1 [2]
13
12 (a) (i) loudspeaker/doorbell/telephone etc. B1 [1]
(ii) television set/audio amplifier etc. B1 [1]
(iii) satellite/satellite dish/mobile phone etc. B1 [1]
(b) e.g. lower attenuation/fewer repeaters

more secure
less prone to noise/interference
physically smaller/less weight
lower cost
greater bandwidth
(c) (i) ratio = 25 + (62 × 0.21) C1

= 38 dB A1 [2]
(ii) ratio / dB = 10 lg (P2 / P1) C1

38 = 10 lg (P / {9.2 × 10–6})
P = 58 mW or 5.8 × 10–2 W A1 [2]

(allow 1/2 for missing 10 in equation)

(b) (i) graph: square wave PA GE 116
M1
Page 6 correct cross-over
Markpoints
Scheme:
where Teachers’
V2 = V1 version Syllabus Paper
A1
GCE
amplitude 5 V A LEVEL – October/November 2010 9702 43
A1
correct polarity (positive at t = 0) A1 [4]
14
12 (a) (i) 1. signal has same variation (with time) as the data B1
2. consists
(ii) correct symbolof for
(a series
LED of) ‘highs’ and ‘lows’ B1
M1
either
diodes analogue
connected is continuously
correctly between V variable (between limits)
OUT and earth A1
or digital has no intermediate values
correct polarity consistent with graph in (i) B1
A1 [3]
[3]
(ii) e.g. can be regenerated / noise can be eliminated
extra data can be added to check / correct transmitted signal
(any two
10 X-ray images taken reasonable suggestions,
from different 1 each)
angles / X-rays directed from different angles B2
B1 [2]
of one section / slice (1)
all images in the same plane (1)
analogue to
(b) (i) combined
images signal
give is sampled
image at (regular
of section / slicetime) intervals B1
B1
images ofsampled signal
successive is converted
sections / slicesinto a binary number
combined B1
B1 [2]
image formed using a computer B1
image one channel
(ii)formed is required for each bit (of the digital number)
is 3D image (1) B1 [1]
(four B-marks plus any two additional marks) B2 [6]
15
11 (a) e.g. noise can be eliminated / filtered / signal can be regenerated
extra bits can be added to check for errors
multiplexing possible
digital circuits are more reliable / cheaper
any sensible advantages, 1 each, max. 3 B3 [3]
2. smaller changes in loudness / amplitude can be detected B1 [1]
(ii) bit rate = 44.1 × 103 × 16 C1

= 7.06 × 105 s–1
number = 7.06 × 106 × 340
= 2.4 × 108 A1 [2]

outer shields the core from noise / external signals B1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE © UCLES 2010 PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

Page 7 PA GEScheme
Mark 117 Syllabus Paper
1612 (a) takes all the simultaneous digits for one number B1
and ‘sends’ them one after another (along the transmission line) B1 [2]
(b) (i) 0111 A1 [1]
(ii) 0110 A1 [1]
(c) levels shown
t 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
0 8 7 15 6 5 8
(–1 for each error or omission) A2

correct basic shape of graph i.e. series of steps M1
with levels staying constant during correct time intervals A1 [4]
(vertical lines in steps do not need to be shown)
(d) increasing number of bits reduces step height M1

increasing sampling frequency reduces step depth / width M1
reproduction of signal is more exact A1 [3]

GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9702 41
17
11 (a) left-hand bit underlined B1 [1]
(b) 1010, 1110, 1111, 1010, 1001

(5 correct scores 2, 4 correct scores 1) A2 [2]
(c) significant changes in detail of V between samplings M1

so frequency too low A1 [2]
12 (a) e.g. logarithm provides a smaller number

e.g. gain of amplifiers is series found by addition, (not multiplication)
(b) (i) optic fibre B1 [1]
(ii) attenuation/dB = 10 lg(P2/P1) C1

attenuation/dB = 10 lg({6.5 × 10–3}/{1.5 × 10–15}) C1
attenuation/dB = 126
length = 126 / 1.8
length = 70 km A1 [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE © Cambridge International ExaminationsPHYSICS:

2013 WORKBOOK
(b) P(i)= 5VOUT
Q ==9–5R V = 7 S =13 A1
inverting input is positive or V– is positive or V– > V+ so VOUT is negative B1
PA GEgain
118 and so saturates
(four op-amp hasthree
correct 2/2, very large / infinite
correct 1/2) A2B1 [4][3]
18 (ii) noise
13 (a) e.g. sketch:
canVOUT switches from (+) to (–)
be eliminated/waveform canwhen VIN is zero
be regenerated B1
V
extra is +5 V or –5 V
OUT bits of data can be added to check for errors M1
VOUT is negative
cheaper/more when VIN is positive (or v.v.)
reliable A1 [3]
greater rate of transfer of data
(1 each, max 2) B2 [2]
11 (a) product of density and speed M1
density of medium, speed of wave in medium A1 [2]
(not “speed
(b) receives bits of
alllight”,
at one0 time
/2 ) B1
transmits the bits one after another B1 [2]
(b) (i) α = (6.4 – 1.7)2 / (6.4 + 1.7)2 C1

(c) sampling= frequency
0.34 must be higher than/(at least) twice frequency to be sampled M1A1 [2]
either higher (range of) frequencies reproduced on the disc
or I0 = e–µx
(ii) I / lower (range of) frequencies on phone A1C1
either higher
= expquality
(–23 ×(of3.4
sound)
× 10–2on
) disc C1
or high quality
= 0.46 (of sound) not required for phone B1A1 [3][3]
(iii) IR / I = (0.46)2 × 0.34 C1

14 (a) reduction in power (allow intensity/amplitude) B1 [1]
= 0.072 A1 [2]
19 (b) (i) attenuation = 2.4 × 30

12 (a) analogue: continuously variable B1
= 72 dB A1 [1]
digital: two / distinct levels only or 1 s and 0 s or highs and lows B1 [2]
(ii) gain/attenuation/dB = 10 lg(P2/P1) C1
72 = 10 lg(PIN/POUT) or –72 = 10 lg(POUT /PIN) C1
(b) (i) 5 A1 [1]
ratio = 1.6 × 107 A1 [3]
(ii) 1 1 0 1 A1 [1]
(c) e.g. Cambridge
enables smaller/more manageable
International AS/A Levelnumbers to be used
– October/November 2014 9702 43
e.g. gains in dB for series amplifiers are added, not multiplied B1 [1]
(c) greater number of voltage / signal levels B1
smaller step heights ©inCambridge International
reproduced signal Examinations 2014 B1
smaller voltage / signal changes can be seen B1 [3]
13 (a) same carrier frequencies can be re-used M1

but not in neighbouring cells / possible to use more handsets A1 [2]

(b) e.g. wavelength is short (M1)
so aerial on mobile phone conveniently short (A1)
e.g. limited range (M1)

so low power / less interference between cells (A1)
e.g. large number of channels / greater bandwidth (M1)

so more simultaneous callers (A1) [4]

Page 4 PA GE Scheme
205 (a) (i) 1011 A1 [1]
(ii)
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
1011 0110 1000 1110 0101 0011 0001
All 6 correct, 2 marks. 5 correct, 1 mark. A2 [2]
(b) sketch: 6 horizontal steps of width 0.25 ms shown M1
steps at correct heights and all steps shown A1
steps shown in correct time intervals A1 [3]
(c) increase sampling frequency/rate M1
so that step width/depth is reduced A1
increase number of bits (in each number) M1
so that step height is reduced A1 [4]
6 (a) sketch: from x = 0 to x = R, potential is constant at VS B1
smooth curve through (R, VS) and (2R, 0.5VS) B1
smooth curve continues to (3R, 0.33VS) B1 [3]
(b) sketch: from x = 0 to x = R, field strength is zero B1
smooth curve through (R, E) and (2R, 0.25E) B1
smooth curve continues to (3R, 0.11E) B1 [3]
7 (a) line has non-zero intercept/line does not pass through origin B1
charge is/should be proportional to potential (difference)

or
charge is/should be zero when p.d. is zero
(therefore there is a systematic error) B1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 2016 WORKBOOK

PHYSICS:
© Cambridge International Examinations
to give A1 [2]
at 20 ˚C / at > 10 ˚C, V – < V + and VOUT is +9 V B1
V3OUT switches
2 between negativeSection
and positive
B at 10 ˚C B1 [4]
6
(allow 5similar scheme if 20PA˚C
GEtreated
120 first)
9 (a) light-emitting diode (allow LED) B1 [1]

21
10 (a) product of density (of medium) and speed of sound (in the medium)
11 (a) frequency of carrier wave varies (in synchrony) with signal
B1
M1
[1]
(in synchrony)
(b) gives a high or with
a lowdisplacement
output / +5 Voforsignal
–5 V output A1
M1 [2]
α would beon
(b) dependent nearly equal
which of the to inputs
1 is at a higher potential M1A1 [2]
either reflected intensity would be nearly equal to incident intensity
(b) advantages
or e.g. forless
coefficient noise / less
transmitted interference
intensity = (1 – α) M1
providesintensity
transmitted
(c) (i) greater
a reference/constantbandwidth
would be small / better quality
potential A1B1 [1]
[3]
(1 each, max 2)
disadvantages
(ii) determinese.g. short range
temperature / more transmitters / line of sight
of ‘switch-over’ B1 [1]
(c) (i) α = (1.7 – 1.3)2 /more + 1.3)2 circuitry
(1.7 complex C1
= 0.018 greater expense A1 [2]
(1 each,
(d) (i) relay max 2) B4
A1 [4]
[1]
(ii) attenuation in fat = exp(–48 × 2x × 10–2) C1
0.012 = 0.018 exp(–48 × 2x × 10–2) C1
(ii) relay connected correctly for op-amp output and high-voltage circuit B1
= 0.42 cm
x/ loss/dB
12 (a) gaindiode A1 C1 [3]
with = 10 lg(P
correct 1/P2)
polarity in output from op-amp B1 [2]
190 = 10 lg(18 × 103 / P2)
3
22
11 (a) or –190 = of
frequency lg P2 / wave
10carrier 18 × 10 )
varies M1C1
–15
power
10 (a) background
(in synchrony) ×with
= 1.8reading
10 the =W19displacement of the information signal A1
A1B1 [3]
[1]
[2]
(b) A(i)
(b)
(b) 5.0GHz
(i)= 211 V / 12 GHz A1A1
B1 [1]
[1]
B=5 A1
(ii) 640 kHz
(ii) A1 [1]
C = 9e.g. so that input signal to satellite will not be ‘swamped’ A1
D = 3to
(iii)
avoid interference of uplink with / by downlink
560 kHz
B1
A1A1
[1]
[4]
[1]
(Allow 1 mark if only subtracts background reading)
(iv) 7000 (condone unit) A1 [1]
(c) (i) either 5, 14 or 14, 5 (A+D, B+C or v.v.) B1 [1]

12 (a) e.g. acts as ‘return’ for the signal
shieldsnumbers
(ii) Three inner core
andfrom noise
‘inside’ / interference
number / cross-talk
is 8 (B+D) B1
(any two sensible answers, 1 each, max 2)
Three numbers and ‘outside’ numbers are either 2,9 or 9,2 (A,C or v.v.) B2B1 [2]
[2]
(b) e.g. greater bandwidth

23
11 (a) high less
frequency wave (per unit length)
attenuation B1
the amplitude or the frequency is varied
less noise / interference M1
the variation represents the information signal /
Page 6 (any twowith
in synchrony
sensible answers, Mark
(the displacement
1 each,
Schememax 2)
of) the information signal. Syllabus B2
Paper [2]
A1 [3]
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9702 43
(c) attenuation is 2.4 dB C1
e.g. shorter =aerial
(b) attenuation required
10 lg(P 1 / P2) © UCLES 2010 C1
longer
ratio transmission range / lower transmitter power / less attenuation
= 1.7 A1 [3]
allows more than one©station in a International
Cambridge region Examinations 2012
less distortion © University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011

84 = 10 lg ({450 × 10–3 } / P)
P = 1.8 × 10–9 W A1 [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE
(answer 1.1 ×108 W scores 1 mark only) PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

= 98 dB C1
PA GE 121
24
11 (a) (i) amplitude of the carrier wave varies M1
(in synchrony) with the displacement of the information signal A1 [2]
(ii) e.g. more than one radio station can operate in same region/less interference
enables shorter aerial
increased range/less power required/less attenuation
less distortion
(any two sensible answers, 1 each) B2 [2]
(b) (i) frequency = 909 kHz C1

wavelength = (3.0 × 108) / (909 × 103)
= 330 m A1 [2]
(ii) bandwidth = 18 kHz A1 [1]
(iii) frequency = 9000 Hz A1 [1]
12 (a) for received signal, 28 = 10 lg(P / {0.36 × 10–6}) C1

P = 2.3 × 10–4 W A1 [2]
–3
255 (b)
(a) loss in fibre
amplitude = 10
of the lg({9.8
carrier × 10
wave } / {2.27 × 10–4})
varies M1 C1
= 16 dB A1 [2]
in synchrony with displacement of the information/audio signal A1 [2]
(c) attenuation per unit length = 16 / 85

(b) (i) 10 kHz = 0.19 dB km–1 A1 [1]
A1 [1]
(ii) 5 kHz A1 [1]
(c) (i) 24 = 10 lg (PMIN / {5.0 × 10–13}) C1
PMIN = 1.3 (1.26) × 10–10 W A1 [2]
(ii) 45 × 2 = 10 lg ({500 × 10–3} / P)
P = 5.0 × 10–10 (W) M1
P > PMIN so yes A1
or
maximum attenuation calculated to be 96 (dB) (M1)

96 dB > 2 × 45 dB so yes (A1)
or
maximum length of wire calculated to be 48 (km) (M1)

actual length 45 km < 48 km so yes (A1)
or
maximum attenuation per unit length calculated to be 2.2 dB km–1 (M1)

2.2 dB km–1 > 2.0 dB km–1 so yes (A1) [2]
6 © Cambridge International Examinations 2013

(a) lines perpendicular to surface
CEDAR COLLEGE
or PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
lines are radial M1
lines appear to come from centre A1 [2]

(ii) 20 kHz ................................................................................................................ B1 [1]
PA GE 122
[Total: 8]
26
12 (a) (i) base stations ...................................................................................................... B1 [1]
(ii) cellular exchange ................................................................................................ B1 [1]
(b) base station / X sends / receives signal to / from handset ...................... .................. B1
call relayed to cellular exchange / Y (and on to PSTN) ............................................. B1
computer at cellular exchange monitors signal from base stations ........................... B1
selects base station with strongest signal ................................................................. B1
allocates a (carrier) frequency / time slot for the call ................................................ B1 [5]
[Total: 7]

27
11 (a) (i) switch M1
so that one aerial can be used for transmission and reception A1 [2]
(ii) tuning circuit M1

to select (one) carrier frequency (and reject others) A1 [2]
(iii) analogue-to-digital converter/ADC M1

converts microphone output to a digital signal A1 [2]
(iv) (a.f.) amplifier (not r.f. amplifier) M1

to increase (power of) signal to drive the loudspeaker A1 [2]
(b) e.g. short aerial so easy to handle

short range so less interference between base stations
larger waveband so more carrier frequencies
(any two sensible suggestions, 1 each, max 2) B2 [2]

GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/J
© UCLES 2009 une 2 0 12 9 70 2 41
28
13 (a) (i) no interference (between signals) near boundaries (of cells) B1 [1]
(ii) for large area, signal strength would have to be greater and this could
be hazardous to health B1 [1]
(b) mobile phone is sending out an (identifying) signal M1

computer/cellular exchange continuously selects cell/base station
with strongest signal A1
computer/cellular exchange allocates (carrier) frequency (and slot) A1 [3]

Page 7 PA GE Scheme
2912 (a) takes all the simultaneous digits for one number B1
and ‘sends’ them one after another (along the transmission line) B1 [2]
(b) (i) 0111 A1 [1]
(ii) 0110 A1 [1]
(c) levels shown
t 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
0 8 7 15 6 5 8
(–1 for each error or omission) A2

correct basic shape of graph i.e. series of steps M1
with levels staying constant during correct time intervals A1 [4]
(vertical lines in steps do not need to be shown)
(d) increasing number of bits reduces step height M1

increasing sampling frequency reduces step depth / width M1
reproduction of signal is more exact A1 [3]

Cambridge International AS / A Level – May / June 2015 9702 42
30
12 handset transmits (identification) signal to number of base stations B1
base stations transfers (signal) to cellular exchange B1
(idea of stations needed at least once in first two marking points)
computer at cellular exchange selects base station with strongest signal B1

computer at cellular exchange selects a carrier frequency for mobile phone B1 [4]
(idea of computer needed at least once in these two marking points)
CEDAR COLLEGE © Cambridge International ExaminationsPHYSICS:

2013 WORKBOOK
disadvantages e.g. short range / more transmitters / line of sight
more complex circuitry
greater expense
PA GE 124
(1 each, max 2) B4 [4]
31
12 (a) gain / loss/dB = 10 lg(P1/P2) C1
190 = 10 lg(18 × 103 / P2)
or –190 = 10 lg P2 / 18 × 103) C1
power = 1.8 × 10–15 W A1 [3]
(b) (i) 11 GHz / 12 GHz
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2 011 9 7 02 B1
42 [1]
Section B
Section (ii) e.g. so that input signal to satellite will not be ‘swamped’
9 (a) Bthinto/ fineavoid metal wire
interference of uplinkTeachers’
with / by downlink B1B1 [1]
Page 6 Mark Scheme: version Syllabus Paper
lay-out
Page 6 shown as a grid Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus B1 Paper
9 (a) thin / fine metal
GCE
encased in plastic wire
AS/A LEVEL – October/November
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2010
2010 9702
9702 B1
B141 41 [3]
lay-out shown as a grid B1
(ii)
encaseduse an amplifier
in an
plastic B1 M1M1 [3]
(ii) use amplifier
coupled to the microphone A1 [2]
(b) (i) gain (of amplifier)
coupled to the microphone B1 A1 [1][2]
(repeater amplifiers scores no mark)
(repeater amplifiers scores no mark)
(b) (i) gain (of amplifier) + B1 [1]
(ii) for VOUT = 0, then V = V – or V1 = V2 C1
32 V1 = (1000/1125) ×+4.5 – C1
12 12(a) (a)
(carrier
(ii) for wave)
V wave) = transmitted
0, then V =from V Earth
or V1to
= satellite
Vto2 satellite (1) (1) C1
V1 =OUT
(carrier 4.0 V transmitted from Earth A1 [3]
satellite receives
V1 = (1000/1125)
satellite greatly
receives greatly attenuated signal
× 4.5 attenuated signal (1) (1) C1
signal V 1
signalamplified
= 4.0 V and transmitted back to Earth A1 B1 B1 [3]
(iii) V 2 =amplified
(1000 / and transmitted
1128) × 4.5 back to Earth
at aatdifferent
a different (carrier) frequency
(carrier) frequency B1
different = 3.99 V C1 B1
(iii) V2 =frequencies
different (1000 / 1128)
frequencies prevent4.5 swamping
×prevent swampingof uplink signal
of uplink signal (1) (1)
OUT = 12 × (3.99 – 4.00)
ofVfrequencies
e.g.e.g. = 3.99 V
of frequencies used used (6/4 GHz,
(6/4 14/11 GHz, 30/20 GHz) (1) (1) C1
(two B1 = (–)plus
marks V two other for additional physics) GHz)
0.12any GHz, 14/11 GHz, 30/20 A1B2 [4]
[2]
VOUT
(two B1=marks
12 × (3.99 – 4.00)
plus any two other for additional physics) B2 [4]
= (–) 0.12 V A1 [2]
© UCLES 2010
strong
10 (b) / large (uniform)
advantage: magnetic
e.g.e.g.
much field time delay
shorter B1M1
(b) advantage:
nuclei precess / rotate about much shorter time delay
field direction (1) M1
because
10 strong / large (uniform) magnetic orbits
field
because areare
orbits much
much lower
lower B1 A1 A1
radio frequency pulse e.g. whole B1
nuclei precess / rotate about fieldEarth may
direction be becovered (1) (M1)
at Larmor frequency e.g.in several
whole Earth
orbits
may
/ with
covered
network (1) (M1)
(A1)
radio frequency pulse in several orbits / with network B1(A1)
causes resonance
disadvantage: / nuclei absorb energy B1
at Larmor frequencye.g.e.g.either
disadvantage: eithermust be be
must tracked
tracked (1)
on relaxation / de-excitation,
or nuclei emituse
limited r.f. pulse
in any one orbit B1M1
causes resonance / nuclei absorb or energy
limited use in any one orbit B1 M1
pulse detected and processed more satellites required for for
continuous (1)
operation
on relaxation / de-excitation, nuclei
more emit r.f.
satellites pulse
required continuous operation B1 A1 A1 [4] [4]
allows for location of detection to be changed (1)
11 (a) e.g. unreliable communication (M1)
33 because ion
11 (a) e.g. unreliable layers vary in height / density
communication (A1)
(M1)
e.g.because
cannot carry all information
ion layers required
vary in height / density (M1)
(A1)
bandwidth
e.g. cannot carrytoo
all narrow
information required (A1)
(M1)
e.g.bandwidth
coverage limited
too narrow (M1)
(A1)
reception poor in hilly areas
e.g. coverage limited (A1)
(M1)
(anyreception
two sensible
poor suggestions,
in hilly areas M1 & A1 for each, max 4) (A1) [4]
(any two sensible suggestions, M1 & A1 for each, max 4) [4]
(b) signal must be amplified (greatly) before transmission back to Earth B1
uplinkmust
(b) signal signal
bewould be swamped
amplified by downlink
(greatly) before signal back to Earth
transmission B1
B1 [2]
uplink signal would be swamped by downlink signal B1 [2]

Page 7 Mark Scheme:PA GE 125 version
Teachers’ Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9702 41
34
12 (a) e.g. signal can be regenerated .................................................................................M1
so that there is minimal noise .................................................................................... A1
e.g. extra data can be added ....................................................................................M1
so that signal can be checked for errors .................................................................... A1 [4]
(any two, sensible suggestions, M1 + A1, max 4)
(b) (i) 1101 ................................................................................................................... B1 [1]
(ii) 5 ......................................................................................................................... B1 [1]
(c) (i) block X: serial-to parallel ................................................................................... B1

block Y: DAC / digital-to-analogue (converter) .................................................. B1 [2]
(ii) takes the simultaneous / all bits of a number ....................................................M1

and transmits them one after another / down a single line ................................ A1 [2]
(d) increase number of bits in digital number at each sampling ......................................M1

so that step height is reduced ................................................................................... A1
increase sampling frequency / reduce time between samples ..................................M1
so that depth / width of step is reduced ..................................................................... A1 [4]
(do not allow ‘smoother output’)
[Total: 14]

GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2 0 10 9702 42
3512 (a) signal becomes distorted / noisy B1

signal loses power / energy / intensity / is attenuated B1 [2]
(b) (i) either numbers involved are smaller / more manageable / cover wider range
or calculations involve addition & subtraction rather than multiplication and division
B1 [1]
(ii) 25 = 10 lg(Pmin / (6.1 × 10–19)) C1

minimum signal power = 1.93 × 10–16 W C1
signal loss = 10 lg(6.5 × 10–3)/(1.93 × 10–16)
= 135 dB C1
maximum cable length = 135 / 1.6 C1
= 85 km so no repeaters necessary A1 [5]
© UCLES 2009

Section B
(iii) 560 kHz A1 [1]
9 e.g. reduced
(a) (iv) gain unit) PA GE 126
7000 (condone A1 [1]
increased stability
greater bandwidth or less distortion
36
12 (a) (allow anyastwo
e.g. acts sensible
‘return’ suggestions,
for the signal 1 each, max 2) B2 [2]
shields inner core from noise / interference / cross-talk
(any two sensible answers, 1 each, max 2) B2 [2]
(b) (i) V – connected to midpoint between resistors B1
VOUT clear and input to V+ clear B1 [2]
(b) e.g. greater bandwidth
less attenuation
(ii) gain = 1 + RF/R(per unit length)
less noise / interference
15 = 1 + 12000/R C1
(any two
R = 860 Ω sensible answers, 1 each, max 2) B2 A1 [2]
[2]
(c) attenuation is 2.4 dB C1

(c) graph: straight
attenuation = 10line from
lg(P 1 / P2(0,0)
) to (0.6,9.0) C1 B1
straight line from (0.6,9.0) to (1.0,9.0)
ratio = 1.7 A1 B1 [2]
[3]

(d) either relay can be used to switch a large current/voltage M1
output current of op-amp is a few mA/very small A1 [2]
or relay can be used as a remote switch (M1)
for inhospitable region/avoids using long heavy cables (A1)
37
10 (a) e.g. large bandwidth/carries more information
low attenuation of signal
low cost
smaller diameter, easier handling, easier storage, less weight
high security/no crosstalk
low noise/no EM interference
(allow any four sensible suggestions, 1 each, max 4) B4 [4]
(b) (i) infra-red B1 [1]
(ii) lower attenuation than for visible light B1 [1]
(c) (i) gain/dB = 10 lg(P2/P1) C1

26 = 10 lg(P2/9.3 × 10–6)
P2 = 3.7 × 10–3 W A1 [2]
(ii) power loss along fibre = 30 × 0.2 = 6.0 dB C1

either 6 = 10 lg(P/3.7 × 10–3) or 6 dB = 4 × 3.7 × 10–3
or 32 = 10 lg(P/9.3 × 10–6)
input power = 1.5 × 10–2 W A1 [2]

= 7.06 × 105 s–1
number = 7.06 × 106 × 340
= 2.4 × 108 PA GE 127 A1 [2]
38

Page 6outer shields the core fromMark
noise / external signals
Scheme Syllabus B1 [2]
Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/Nov ember 2 0 1 2 9702 41
(b) attenuation per unit length = 1/L × 10 lg(P2/P1) C1

= 102.5 ×International
© Cambridge
signal power at receiver 3.8 × 10–8 Examinations 2012
= 1.2 × 10–5 W C1
Pageattenuation
6 in wire pair = 10Mark
lg({3.0 × 10–3} / {1.2 × 10–5})
Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL= 24 dB– October/November 2012 9702 C1
43
attenuation per unit length = 24 / 1.4
(b) e.g. shorter aerial required = 17 dB km–1 A1 [4]
longer
(othertransmission range
correct methods of /calculation
lower transmitter power / less attenuation
are possible)
allows more than one station in a region
less distortion
39

84 = 10 lg ({450 × 10–3 } / P)
P = 1.8 × 10–9 W A1 [3]
(answer 1.1 ×108 W scores 1 mark only)

= 98 dB C1
maximum length = 98/2.1
= 47 km A1 [2]

P = 2.
5 Qat=time
9 Rt1=, diode
7 S =13
R is emitting light, diode G is not emitting B1
at time t2, diode R is not
PA
emitting, diode G is emitting
GE 128
B1 [2]
(four correct
(must2/2,
bethree correctwith
consistent 1/2)graph line. If no graph line then 0 / 2) A2 [4]
40
13 (a)
(a) X-ray:
e.g. noise
11 flat /can be eliminated/waveform
shadow / 2D image can be regenerated B1
extra bits of data can be added to check
regardless of depth of object / depth not forindicated
errors B1
cheaper/more reliable
greater
CT scan: rate
built upoffrom
transfer of data
(many) images at different angles B1
(1 each, max 2)
image is three-dimensional B2
B1 [2]
image can be rotated / viewed at different angles B1 [5]
(b) receives bits all at one time B1
transmits the bits one after another B1 [2]
(b) (i) I R I0 e–µx C1
0.25 R e–0.69x
(c) sampling mm (allow
x R2.0frequency 1 s.f.)
must be higher than/(at least) twice frequency to be sampled A1
M1 [2]
either higher (range of) frequencies
–0.46 × 2.4
reproduced on the disc
(ii)
or for aluminium, I / I 0 R e
lower (range of) frequencies on phone A1
either higher quality (ofR 0.33 on disc
sound) C1
or fraction R 0.33(of
high quality × 0.25
sound) not required for phone B1 [3]
= = = R 0.083 A1 [2]
14 (a)(iii)
reduction in power
gain / dB R 10 lg(I / I0(allow
) intensity/amplitude) B1
C1 [1]
R 10 lg(0.083)
= = = R (–) 10.8 dB (allow 2 s.f.) A1
(b) (i) with
attenuation
negative= 2.4
sign× 30 B1 [3]
= 72 dB A1 [1]
41 (ii) satellite
gain/attenuation/dB = 10orbit
lg(P2/P1) C1
12 (a) (i) is in equatorial B1
72 = 10 lg(P /P
travelling from west
IN OUT ) to eastor –72 = 10 lg(POUT /PIN) C1
B1
7
ratio = 1.6 × 10
period of 24 hours / 1 day A1
B1 [3][3]
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9702 42
(c) e.g. enables smaller/more
©signalmanageable
Cambridge numbers
International to be used2014
Examinations
(ii)gains
e.g. either uplink
in dB for series is highly
amplifiers attenuated
are added, not multiplied B1 [1]
or signal is highly amplified (before transmission) as downlink signal B1
prevents downlink signal swamping the uplink signal B1 [2]
(b) speed of signal is same order of magnitude in both systems B1

optic fibre link (much) shorter than via satellite M1
time delay using optic fibre is less A1 [3]

and there are many slices A1
X-ray image is a single exposure B1
(b) (so
(i) much) greater
1. resistor exposure
between PACT
VINwith
and GE 129 V+ connected to earth
V– scan
and B1 B1[4]
–
resistor between V and VOUT B1 [2]
42
12 (a) (i) e.g.
2. Psatellite
/ + signcommunication,
shown on earthmobile
side ofphones, line of sight communication, wifi
voltmeter B1 B1[1] [1]
(ii) e.g.
(ii) ratioconnection of40
of RF / RIN = TV to aerial, loudspeaker, microphone (if clearly identified) B1 M1[1]
RIN between 100 Ω and 10 kΩ A1 [2]
(iii) e.g.
(anya.f. amplifier
values musttolink
loudspeaker, landline
to the correct for phone
resistors on the diagram) B1 [1]
(b) (i) attenuation / dB = 10 lg (P2 / P1) C1

10 (a) product of density (of medium) and speed (of ultrasound) M1
–190 = 10 lg (P2 / 3.1)
in the medium –19 A1 [2]
P2 = 3.1 × 10 kW A1 [2]
(ii) signal is amplified M1

7.0 × 106 =
(b) (i) frequency 1.7 × 103 × speed
is changed M1
C1
speed
to = 4.12
prevent × 103 mofs–1
swamping up-link signal by down-link (signal) A1 [3]
wavelength = (4.12 × 103) / (9.0 × 105) m C1
= 4.6 mm (2 s.f. minimum) A1 [3]
(ii) for air/tissue boundary, IR / I ≈ 1 M1

for air/tissue boundary, (almost) complete reflection/no transmission A1
for gel/tissue boundary, IR / I = 0.12 / 3.12
= 1.04 × 10–3 (accept 1 s.f.) M1
gel enables (almost) complete transmission (into the tissue) A1 [4]
43
11 (a) (i) metal (allow specific example of a metal) B1 [1]
(ii) e.g. provides ‘return’ for the signal

shields inner core from interference/reduces cross-talk/reduces noise
increased security
(b) (i) (gradual) loss of power/intensity/amplitude B1 [1]
(ii) dB is a log scale B1

either large (range of) numbers are easier to handle (on a log scale)
or compounding attenuations/amplifications is easier B1 [2]
(c) attenuation = 190 × 11 × 10–3 = 2.09 dB C1

–2.09 = 10 lg(POUT / PIN) C1
ratio = 0.62 A1 [3]

PA GE 130
CT SCAN 

PA GE 131
10 (a) Briefly explain the principles of CT scanning. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [6]

PA GE 132
19
(b) A simple section through a body consists of four voxels, as illustrated in Fig. 10.1. For
Examiner’s
section Use
directions
of viewing
Fig. 10.1
An X-ray image of the section is obtained by viewing along each of the directions shown
in Fig. 10.1.
The detector readings for each direction of viewing are summed to give the pattern of
readings shown in Fig. 10.2.
25 22
34 31
Fig. 10.2
For any one direction, the total of the detector readings is 16.
(i) For the pattern of readings of Fig. 10.2, state the magnitude of the background
reading.
background reading = ................................................ [1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, mark the pattern of pixels for the four-voxel section. [2]

PA GE 133
10 Outline the principles of CT scanning. For

Examiner’s
................................................................................................................................................. Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]

PA GE 134
21
(b) Determine each of the pixel readings. For

Examiner’s
Use
A= B=
............ ............
D= C=
............ ............
[4]
(c) Use your answers in (b) to determine the pixel readings along
(i) the direction D3,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the direction D4.
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

PA GE 135
10 A simple model of one section of a CT scan is shown in Fig. 10.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
A B
D C
Fig. 10.1
The model consists of four voxels with pixel numbers A, B, C and D.
In this model, the voxels are viewed in turn along four different directions D1, D2, D3 and D4
as shown in Fig. 10.2.
D3
D2 D4
A B
D1
D C
Fig. 10.2
The pixel readings in each of the four directions are noted.

The total pixel reading for any one direction is 19.
The pixel readings for all of the directions are summed to give the pattern of readings shown
in Fig. 10.3.
25 34
28 46
Fig. 10.3
(a) State the background reading in this model.
background reading = .................................................. [1]

PA GE 136
21
(i) Calculate the thickness of copper required to reduce the intensity of the emergent beam
to 0.25 I0.
thickness = ................................................. mm [2]
(ii) An aluminium filter of thickness 2.4 mm is now placed in the X-ray beam, together with
the copper filter in (i).
Calculate the fraction of the incident intensity that emerges after passing through the two
filters.
fraction = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) Express your answer in (ii) as a gain in decibels (dB).
gain = ................................................... dB [3]

PA GE 137

20
11 (a) Distinguish between an X-ray image of a body structure and a CT scan.
X-ray image: ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
CT scan: ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) Data for the linear absorption (attenuation) coefficient μ of X-ray radiation of energy 80 keV
are given in Fig. 11.1.
metal μ / mm−1
aluminium 0.46
copper 0.69
Fig. 11.1
A parallel X-ray beam is incident on a copper filter, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
copper
filter
incident beam emergent

intensity I0 beam
Fig. 11.2
The intensity of the incident beam is I0.

© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14
PA GE 138
Page 5
ANSWERS
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010
Syllabus
9702
Paper
41
1 (a)
10
Page 5 Mark Scheme
X-ray taken of slice / plane / section
Syllabus Paper
B1
GCE AS/A LEVEL
repeated at different angles – October/November 2012 9702 41
B1
images / data is processed B1
Section B
combined / added to give (2-D) image of slice B1
repeated for successive slices B1
9 (a) e.g. zero output impedance / resistance
to build up a 3-D image B1
infinite can
image inputbeimpedance / resistance
viewed from different angles / rotated B1
infinite (open loop) gain max 6 [6]
infinite bandwidth
infinite slew rate
(b) 1(i)each,
16 max. 3 B3
A1 [3]
[1]
(ii) evidence of deducting 16 then dividing by 3 C1

(b) (i) to
graph:
give square wave M1
A1 [2]
correct cross-over points where V2 = V1 A1
3 2
amplitude 5 V A1
6
correct5polarity (positive at t = 0) A1 [4]
(ii) correct symbol for LED M1

11 (a) frequency
diodesofconnected
carrier wave variesbetween
correctly (in synchrony) withearth
VOUT and signal M1
A1
(in synchrony) with displacement
correct polarity consistent with of graph
signalin (i) A1
A1 [2]
[3]
(b) advantages e.g. less noise / less interference

210 X-ray images taken from greater
differentbandwidth / better
angles / X-rays quality from different angles
directed B1
of one(1 section
each, max 2)
/ slice (1)
disadvantages
all images in the samee.g.plane
short range / more transmitters / line of sight (1)
images combined to givemore image complex
of sectioncircuitry
/ slice B1
images of successive sections greater expense
/ slices combined B1
image (1 formed
each, max 2) a computer
using B4
B1 [4]
image formed is 3D image (1)
12 (a)
(fourgain / loss/dB
B-marks = 10two
plus any lg(P 1/P2)
additional marks) C1
B2 [6]
190 = 10 lg(18 × 103 / P2)
or –190 = 10 lg P2 / 18 × 103) C1
–15
11 (a) power
e.g. noise can×be
= 1.8 10eliminated
W / filtered / signal can be regenerated A1 [3]
extra bits can be added to check for errors
multiplexing possible
(b) digital
(i) 11circuits
GHz / 12 areGHz
more reliable / cheaper B1 [1]
any sensible
(ii) e.g. so that advantages,
input signal1 each, max.will
to satellite 3 not be ‘swamped’ B3 [3]
to avoid interference of uplink with / by downlink B1 [1]
2. smaller changes in loudness / amplitude can be detected B1 [1]
(ii) bit rate = 44.1 × 103 × 16 C1

= 7.06 × 105 s–1
number = 7.06 × 106 × 340
= 2.4 × 108 A1 [2]

CEDAR COLLEGEouter shields the core from noise / external signals PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
B1 [2]
© UCLES 2010

(d) (i) relay A1 [1]
PA GE B
Section 139
(ii) relay connected correctly for op-amp output and high-voltage circuit B1
10 (a) compares
diode the
withpotentials/voltages at the (inverting
correct polarity in output from op-ampand non-inverting) inputs B1 [2]
either output (potential) dependent on which input is the larger

310 (a) or V+ > V–,reading
background = 19
then VOUT is positive B1 [1]
states the other condition B1 [3]
(b) A = 2 A1
B = ring
(b) (i) 5 drawn around both the LEDs (and series resistors) A1
B1 [1]
C=9 A1
D =V
(ii) 3– R (1.5 × 2.4) / (1.2 N 2.4) R 1.0 V A1
B1 [4]
[1]
(Allow 1 mark
(allow if only
1.5 × subtracts
2.4 / 3.6 background reading)
R 1.0 V)
(iii) 1. VOUT switches at N1.0 V B1

(c) (i) either 5, 14 or V
maximum 14, 5 (A+D, B+C or v.v.)
OUT is 5.0 V
B1
B1 [1]
when curve is above N1.0 V, VOUT is negative (or v.v.) B1 [3]
(ii) Three numbers and ‘inside’ number is 8 (B+D) B1
Three
2. numbers
at time and R
t1, diode ‘outside’ numbers
is emitting light, are G is2,9
either
diode notor 9,2 (A,C or v.v.)
emitting B1
B1 [2]
at time t2, diode R is not emitting, diode G is emitting B1 [2]
(must be consistent with graph line. If no graph line then 0 / 2)
11 (a) high frequency wave B1
the amplitude or the frequency is varied M1
11 the variation
4 (a) X-ray: represents
flat / shadow the information signal /
/ 2D image B1
in synchrony
regardless of depth of object /of)
with (the displacement the not
depth information
indicatedsignal. A1
B1 [3]
CT scan: built up from (many) images at different angles B1

image is three-dimensional B1
image can be rotated / viewed at different angles B1 [5]
(b) (i) I R I0 e–µx C1

0.25 R e–0.69x
x R2.0 mm (allow 1 s.f.) A1 [2]
(ii) for aluminium, I / I0 R e–0.46 × 2.4

R 0.33 C1
fraction R 0.33 × 0.25
= = = R 0.083 A1 [2]
(iii) gain / dB R 10 lg(I / I0) C1

R 10 lg(0.083)
= = = R (–) 10.8 dB (allow 2 s.f.) A1
with negative sign B1 [3]
12 (a) (i) satellite is in equatorial orbit B1

travelling from west to east B1
period of 24 hours / 1 day B1 [3]

PA GE 14 0
 
 
 
MRI 

PA GE 141

22
10 Explain briefly the main principles of the use of magnetic resonance to obtain diagnostic For
information about internal body structures. Examiner’s
Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [8]

PA GE 142
12 A person is to be investigated using a magnetic resonance (MR) scanner. For

Examiner’s
(a) This technique involves the use of two superimposed magnetic fields. Use
Describe the functions of these two magnetic fields.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The frequency f of the electromagnetic waves emitted by protons on relaxation in an MR

scanner is given by the equation
f = 2cB
where B is the total magnetic flux density and c is a constant equal to 1.34 × 108 s–1 T –1.
The magnetic flux density changes by 2.0 × 10–4 T for each 1.0 cm thickness of tissue in
a section.
The scanner is adjusted so that the thickness of each section is 3.0 mm.
Calculate, for corresponding points in neighbouring sections,
(i) the difference in magnetic flux density,
difference in flux density = .............................................. T [1]
(ii) the change in emitted frequency.
frequency change = ........................................... Hz [2]

© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12
+
(ii) for
(ii) relay will=switch
VOUT 0, thenon
V for V – or
= one V1 = of
polarity V2 output (voltage) C1C1
1 = (1000/1125)
Vswitches on when×output
4.5 (voltage) is negative A1C1 [2]
V1 = 4.0 V PA GE 143 A1 [3]
11 (a)(iii) 2 = (1000
(i) Ve.m. / 1128)
radiation × 4.5 whenever charged particle is accelerated
produced M1
= 3.99 Vhitting target have distribution of accelerations
electrons A1C1 [2]
VOUT = 12 × (3.99 – 4.00)
(ii) either= (–)wavelength
or
0.12 V
ANSWERS
shorter/shortest for greater/greatest acceleration
λmin = hc/ Emax
A1 [2]
or minimum wavelength for maximum energy B1

1 strong / large
10 (uniform)
all electron magnetic
energy givenfield
up in one collision/converted to single photon B1B1 [2]
radio frequency pulse B1
at
(b)Larmor frequencymeasures the penetration of the beam
(i) hardness (1) C1
causes resonance / nuclei absorb
greater hardness, greaterenergy
penetration A1B1 [2]
on relaxation / de-excitation, nuclei emit r.f. pulse B1
pulse(ii)
detected and by
controlled processed
changing the anode voltage (1) C1
non-uniform fieldanode
higher superposed
voltage,ongreater
uniform field
penetration/hardness A1B1 [2]
(six (i) long-wavelength
(c) points, 1 each plus anyradiation
two extramore likely
– max 8) to be absorbed in the body/less [8]
likely to penetrate through body B1 [1]
11 (a) e.g.
(ii) unreliable
(aluminium)communication
filter/metal foil placed in the X-ray beam (M1) B1 [1]
because ion layers vary in height / density (A1)
e.g. cannot carry all information required (M1)
212 (a) strongbandwidth
uniform too narrow field
(magnetic) (A1) M1
e.g. coverage
either alignslimited
nuclei (M1)
or reception
givespoor
rise toin hilly areas
Larmor/resonant frequency in r.f. region(A1) A1
(any
non-uniform (magnetic)
two sensible field M1 & A1 for each, max 4)
suggestions, M1 [4]
either enables nuclei to be located
or changes the Larmor/resonant frequency A1 [4]
(b) signal must be amplified (greatly) before transmission back to Earth B1
uplink signal would be swamped by downlink signal B1 [2]
(b) (i) difference in flux density = 2.0 × 10–2 × 3.0 × 10–3 = 6.0 × 10–5 T A1 [1]
(ii) ∆f = 2 × c × ∆B C1
= 2 × 1.34 × 108 × 6.0 × 10–5
= 1.6 × 104 Hz A1 [2]

PA GE 14 4
ELECTROMAGNETIC 
INDUCTION 

PA GE 145

14
7 You are provided with a coil of wire, a bar magnet and a sensitive ammeter. For
Examiner’s
Outline an experiment to verify Lenz’s law. Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [6]

© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09
PA GE 146
5 (a) A constant current is maintained in a long straight vertical wire. A Hall probe is positioned For
a distance r from the centre of the wire, as shown in Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
current-carrying
wire
Hall probe
X Y
terminals to
r Hall probe circuitry
and voltmeter
Fig. 5.1
(i) Explain why, when the Hall probe is rotated about the horizontal axis XY, the Hall
voltage varies between a maximum positive value and a maximum negative value.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The maximum Hall voltage VH is measured at different distances r.

Data for VH and the corresponding values of r are shown in Fig. 5.2.
VH / V r / cm
0.290 1.0
0.190 1.5
0.140 2.0
0.097 3.0
0.073 4.0
0.060 5.0
Fig. 5.2
It is thought that VH and r are related by an expression of the form
VH = k
r
where k is a constant.
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

PA GE 147
11
1. Without drawing a graph, use data from Fig. 5.2 to suggest whether the For
expression is valid. Examiner’s
Use
[2]
1
2. A graph showing the variation with of VH is plotted.
r
State the features of the graph that suggest that the expression is valid.
..............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The Hall probe in (a) is now replaced with a small coil of wire connected to a sensitive
voltmeter. The coil is arranged so that its plane is normal to the magnetic field of the
wire.
(i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction and hence explain why the
voltmeter indicates a zero reading.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) State three different ways in which an e.m.f. may be induced in the coil.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]

PA GE 148

14
5 The poles of a horseshoe magnet measure 5.0 cm × 2.4 cm, as shown in Fig. 5.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
direction of
A movement
of wire
copper wire
5.0 cm
2.4 cm pole piece

of magnet
Fig. 5.1
The uniform magnetic flux density between the poles of the magnet is 89 mT. Outside the
region of the poles, the magnetic flux density is zero.
A stiff copper wire is connected to a sensitive ammeter of resistance 0.12 Ω. A student moves
the wire at a constant speed of 1.8 m s–1 between the poles in a direction parallel to the faces
of the poles.
(a) Calculate the magnetic flux between the poles of the magnet.
magnetic flux = .......................................... Wb [2]
(b) (i) Use your answer in (a) to determine, for the wire moving between the poles of the
magnet, the e.m.f. induced in the wire.
e.m.f. = ............................................. V [3]

© UCLES 2010 9702/43/O/N/10
PA GE 149
15
(ii) Show that the reading on the ammeter is approximately 70 mA. For
Examiner’s
Use
[1]
(c) By reference to Lenz’s law, a force acts on the wire to oppose the motion of the wire.
The student who moved the wire between the poles of the magnet claims not to have
felt this force.
Explain quantitatively a reason for this claim.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]

PA GE 15 0
6 A transformer is illustrated in Fig. 6.1. For

Examiner’s
laminated iron Use
core
load
primary secondary
coil coil
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) Explain why the coils are wound on a core made of iron.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest why thermal energy is generated in the core.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Use Faraday’s law to explain why the potential difference across the load and the
e.m.f. of the supply are not in phase.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11
PA GE 151
13
(c) Electrical energy is usually transmitted using alternating current. Suggest why the For
transmission is achieved using Examiner’s
Use
(i) high voltages,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) alternating current.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

PA GE 152
5 A bar magnet is suspended vertically from the free end of a helical spring, as shown in For
Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
helical
spring
magnet
coil
V
Fig. 5.1
One pole of the magnet is situated in a coil. The coil is connected in series with a
high-resistance voltmeter.
The magnet is displaced vertically and then released.
The variation with time t of the reading V of the voltmeter is shown in Fig. 5.2.
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 t / s
Fig. 5.2
(a) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]

© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11
PA GE 153
11
(ii) Use Faraday’s law to explain why For

Examiner’s
1. there is a reading on the voltmeter, Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
2. this reading varies in magnitude,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
3. the reading has both positive and negative values.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Use Fig. 5.2 to determine the frequency f0 of the oscillations of the magnet.
f0 = .......................................... Hz [2]
(c) The magnet is now brought to rest and the voltmeter is replaced by a variable frequency
alternating current supply that produces a constant r.m.s. current in the coil.
The frequency of the supply is gradually increased from 0.7 f0 to 1.3 f0, where f0 is the
frequency calculated in (b).
On the axes of Fig. 5.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with frequency f of the
amplitude A of the new oscillations of the bar magnet.
0
0.7 f0 f0 1.3 f0
f
[2]
Fig. 5.3
PA GE 154
12
(d) (i) Name the phenomenon illustrated on your completed graph of Fig. 5.3. For
Examiner’s
............................................................................................................................ [1] Use
(ii) State one situation where the phenomenon named in (i) is useful.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

PA GE 155

15
7 Two long straight parallel copper wires A and B are clamped vertically. The wires pass For
through
7 Twoholes
longinstraight
a horizontal sheet
parallel of card
copper wiresPQRS,
A andas
B shown in Fig. vertically.
are clamped 7.1. The wires pass Examiner’s
For
through holes in a horizontal sheet of card PQRS, as shown in Fig. 7.1. Use
Examiner’s
wire A wire B Use
wire A wire B
S S R
R
P Q
P Q
Fig. 7.1
Fig. 7.1
(a) There is a current in wire A in the direction shown on Fig. 7.1.
(a) ThereOn Fig.
is a 7.1, draw
current fourAfield
in wire lines
in the in the plane
direction PQRS
shown to represent
on Fig. 7.1. the magnetic field due
to the current in wire A.
On Fig. 7.1, draw four field lines in the plane PQRS to represent the magnetic field due [3]
to the current in wire A. [3]
(b) A direct current is now passed through wire B in the same direction as that in wire A.
The current in wire B is larger than the current in wire A.
(b) A direct current is now passed through wire B in the same direction as that in wire A.
The current
(i) OninFig.
wire B draw
7.1, is larger than in
an arrow thethe
current
plane in wireto
PQRS A.show the direction of the force on
wire B due to the magnetic field produced by the current in wire A. [1]
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow in the plane PQRS to show the direction of the force on
(ii) B
wire Wire
dueAto
also
theexperiences a force.
magnetic field State and
produced byexplain whichinwire,
the current wireif A.
any, will experience
[1]
the larger force.
(ii) Wire A also experiences a force. State and explain which wire, if any, will experience
..................................................................................................................................
the larger force.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
..................................................................................................................................
(c) The direct currents in wires A and B are now replaced by sinusoidal alternating currents
.............................................................................................................................
of equal peak values. The currents are in phase. [2]
Describe the variation, if any, of the force experienced by wire B.
(c) The direct currents in wires A and B are now replaced by sinusoidal alternating currents
of equal peak values. The currents are in phase.
..........................................................................................................................................
Describe the variation, if any, of the force experienced by wire B.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
..........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK [3]
PA GE 156

12
5 (a) Define the tesla. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A horseshoe magnet is placed on a balance. A stiff metal wire is clamped horizontally
between the poles, as illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
horseshoe
magnet
stiff metal
wire
balance pan
Fig. 5.1
The magnetic flux density in the space between the poles of the magnet is uniform and
is zero outside this region.
The length of the metal wire normal to the magnetic field is 6.4 cm.
When a current in the wire is switched on, the reading on the balance increases by 2.4 g.
The current in the wire is 5.6 A.
(i) State and explain the direction of the force on the wire due to the current.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12
PA GE 157
13
(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the magnetic flux density between the poles of the For
magnet. Examiner’s
Use
flux density = ...............................................T [2]
(c) A low frequency alternating current is now passed through the wire in (b).
The root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value of the current is 5.6 A.
Describe quantitatively the variation of the reading seen on the balance.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

PA GE 158

10
5 (a) State the relation between magnetic flux density B and magnetic flux Φ, explaining any For
other symbols you use. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A large horseshoe magnet has a uniform magnetic field between its poles. The magnetic
field is zero outside the space between the poles.
A small Hall probe is moved at constant speed along a line XY that is midway between,
and parallel to, the faces of the poles of the magnet, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
Hall
probe
pole of
X magnet
pole of
magnet
Fig. 5.1

© UCLES 2012 9702/43/O/N/12
PA GE 159
11
An e.m.f. is produced by the Hall probe when it is in the magnetic field. For
The angle between the plane of the probe and the direction of the magnetic field is not Examiner’s
varied. Use
On the axes of Fig. 5.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the e.m.f. VH
produced by the Hall probe.
VH
0
t
probe enters probe leaves

magnetic magnetic
field field
Fig. 5.2
[2]
(c) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The Hall probe in (b) is replaced by a small flat coil of wire. The coil is moved at
constant speed along the line XY. The plane of the coil is parallel to the faces of the
poles of the magnet.
On the axes of Fig. 5.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the
e.m.f. E induced in the coil.
0
t
coil enters coil leaves

magnetic magnetic
field field
Fig. 5.3
[3]

PA GE 16 0
5 (a) An incomplete diagram for the magnetic flux pattern due to a current-carrying solenoid For
is illustrated in Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
direction
of current
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig. 5.1, draw arrows on the field lines to show the direction of the magnetic
field. [1]
(ii) State the feature of Fig. 5.1 that indicates that the magnetic field strength at each
end of the solenoid is less than that at the centre.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A Hall probe is placed near one end of the solenoid in (a), as shown in Fig. 5.2.
Y
to circuit Hall probe
for Hall probe
Fig. 5.2
The Hall probe is rotated about the axis XY. State and explain why the magnitude of the
Hall voltage varies.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2013 9702/41/O/N/13
PA GE 161
11
(c) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction. For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The Hall probe in (b) is replaced by a small coil of wire connected to a sensitive
voltmeter.
State three different ways in which an e.m.f. may be induced in the coil.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2013
CEDAR COLLEGE
9702/41/O/N/13
PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
[Turn over
PA GE 162

12
5 A uniform magnetic field of flux density B makes an angle θ with a flat plane PQRS, as For
shown in Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
Q
P
magnetic field
flux density B
S
Fig. 5.1
The plane PQRS has area A.
(a) State
(i) what is meant by a magnetic field,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) an expression, in terms of A, B and θ, for the magnetic flux Φ through the plane
PQRS.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A vertical aluminium window frame DEFG has width 52 cm and length 95 cm, as shown
in Fig. 5.2.
52 cm
E
hinge D
95 cm
hinge
F
G
Fig. 5.2
The frame is hinged along the vertical edge DG.

The horizontal component BH of the Earth’s magnetic field is 1.8 × 10–5 T. For the closed
window, the frame is normal to the horizontal component BH.
The window is opened so that the plane of the window rotates through 90°.
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/O/N/13

PA GE 163
13
(i) Explain why, when the window is opened, the change in magnetic flux linkage due For
to the vertical component of the Earth’s magnetic field is zero. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Calculate, for the window opening through an angle of 90°, the change in magnetic
flux linkage.
change in flux linkage = .......................................... Wb [2]
(c) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The window in (b) is opened in a time of 0.30 s.

Use your answer in (b)(ii) to calculate the average e.m.f. induced in the window
frame.
e.m.f. = ............................................. V [1]
(iii) State the sides of the window frame between which the e.m.f. is induced.
between side ............ and side .............. [1]

PA GE 164

14
7 A solenoid is connected in series with a battery and a switch. A Hall probe is placed close to one
end of the solenoid, as illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
solenoid
Hall probe
Fig. 7.1
The current in the solenoid is switched on. The Hall probe is adjusted in position to give the
maximum reading. The current is then switched off.
(a) The current in the solenoid is now switched on again. Several seconds later, it is switched off.
The Hall probe is not moved.
On the axes of Fig. 7.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the Hall voltage VH.
VH
0
t
current current
switched on switched off
Fig. 7.2
[3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

PA GE 165
15
(b) The Hall probe is now replaced by a small coil. The plane of the coil is parallel to the end of
the solenoid.
(i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) On the axes of Fig. 7.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the e.m.f. E
induced in the coil when the current in the solenoid is switched on and then switched off.
0
t
current current
Fig. 7.3
[3]

PA GE 166
6 A stiff straight copper wire XY is held fixed in a uniform magnetic field of flux density 2.6 × 10−3 T,
stiff wire
uniform magnetic field

34° flux density 2.6 × 10–3 T
4.7 cm 34°
Fig. 6.1
The wire XY has length 4.7 cm and makes an angle of 34° with the magnetic field.
(a) Calculate the force on the wire due to a constant current of 5.4 A in the wire.
force = ..................................................... N [2]
(b) The current in the wire is now changed to an alternating current of r.m.s. value 1.7 A.
Determine the total variation in the force on the wire due to the alternating current.
variation in force = ..................................................... N [3]

PA GE 167
15
6 A stiff straight copper wire XY is held fixed in a uniform magnetic field of flux density 2.6 × 10−3 T,
stiff wire

34° flux density 2.6 × 10–3 T
4.7 cm 34°
Fig. 6.1
The wire XY has length 4.7 cm and makes an angle of 34° with the magnetic field.
(a) Calculate the force on the wire due to a constant current of 5.4 A in the wire.
force = ..................................................... N [2]
(b) The current in the wire is now changed to an alternating current of r.m.s. value 1.7 A.
Determine the total variation in the force on the wire due to the alternating current.
variation in force = ..................................................... N [3]

PA GE 168
10 (a) A coil of insulated wire is wound on a copper core, as illustrated in Fig. 10.1.
insulated copper
wire core
Fig. 10.1
An alternating current is passed through the coil.
The heating effect of the current in the coil is negligible.
Explain why the temperature of the core rises.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Two hollow tubes of equal length hang vertically as shown in Fig. 10.2.
magnet A magnet B
plastic aluminium
tube tube
Fig. 10.2
One tube is made of plastic and the other of aluminium.
Two small similar bar magnets A and B are held above the tubes and then released
simultaneously.
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

PA GE 169
23
The magnets do not touch the sides of the tubes.

Explain why magnet B takes much longer than magnet A to fall through the tube.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 9]

PA GE 170

20
10 Two coils P and Q are placed close to one another, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
coil P coil Q
V
power
supply
Fig. 10.1
(a) The current in coil P is constant.
An iron rod is inserted into coil P.
Explain why, during the time that the rod is moving, there is a reading on the voltmeter
connected to coil Q.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

PA GE 171
21
(b) The current in coil P is now varied as shown in Fig. 10.2.
current
0
0 1 2
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.3, show the variation with time of the reading of the voltmeter connected to coil Q
for time t = 0 to time t = t2.
voltmeter
reading
0
0 1 2 time
Fig. 10.3 [4]
[Total: 6]

2.3 × 10 × 9.8 GCE = AS/A LEVEL
B × 2.6 × 4.4 –× May/J
10 (gune 2 0 loses
= 10, 10 this mark) 9 7 0 2 41
C1
B = 0.20 T A1 [3]
4 (a) ability to do work B1
PA GE 172
as a result of the position/shape, etc. of an object B1 [2]
(c) reading for maximum current = 2.3 × √2 C1
total variation = 2 × 2.3 × √2
(b) (i) 1 ∆Egpe= 6.5 = GMm
g ANSWERS
/r
= (6.67 × 10–11 × {2 × 1.66 × 10–27}2) / (3.8 × 10–15)
C1
A1
C1
[2]
= 1.93 × 10–49 J A1 [3]

71 coil in series with meter (do not allow inclusion of a cell) B1
push known ∆Eepe
2 pole into coil
= Qq / 4πε0r B1
C1
observe current direction 10–19)2 / (4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × 3.8 × 10–15)
(not ×reading)
= (1.6 B1
C1
(induced) field / field from= 6.06 × 10–14magnet
coil repels J B1
A1 [3]
either states rule to determine direction of magnetic field in coil
or (ii) reversing magnet
idea that 2E direction gives opposite deflection on meter
K = ∆Eepe – ∆Egpe
B1
B1
direction of induced current
EK = 3.03 × 10 J –14 such as to oppose the change producing it B1 [6]
= (3.03 × 10–14) / 1.6 × 10–13 M1
= 0.19 MeV A0 [2]
8 (a) wave theory predicts any frequency would give rise to emission of electron M1
if exposure
(iii) time occur
fusion may is sufficiently long into sub-nuclear particles
/ may break A1
B1 [1]
photon has (specific value of) energy dependent on frequency M1
emission if energy greater than threshold / work function / energy to remove
2
5 (a) electron from surface
(i) V depends
H on angle between (plane of) probe and B-field A1
B1 [4]
either VH max when plane and B-field are normal to each other
or VH zero when plane and B-field are parallel
(b) photon is packet/quantum of energy M1
or VH depends on sine of angle between plane and B-field B1 [2]
of electromagnetic radiation A1
(photon) energy = h × frequency B1 [3]
(ii) 1 calculates VHr at least three times M1
to 1 s.f. constant so valid or approx constant so valid
every particle has an (associated) wavelength B1
or to 2 s.f., not constant so invalid A1 [2]
wavelength = h / p M1
where p is the momentum (of the particle) A1 [3]
2 straight line passes through origin B1 [1]
9 (a) (i) ∆N / ∆t (ignore any sign) B1 [1]

(b) (i) e.m.f. induced is proportional / equal to M1
rate of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1
(ii) ∆N / N (ignore
constant any
field in sign)
coil / flux (linkage) of coil does not change B1
B1 [1]
[3]
(ii) e.g. vary current (in wire) / switch current on or off / use a.c. current
(b) source must decay by 8% C1
rotate coil
A = A0 exp(–ln2 t / T½) or A/ A0 = 1 / (2t/T) C1
move coil towards / away from wire (1 mark each, max 3) B3 [3]
0.92 = exp(–ln2 × t / 5.27) or 0.92 = 1 / (2t/5.27 ) C1
t = 0.634 years
= 230 days A1 [4]
6 (a) all four diodes correct to give output, regardless of polarity M1
(allow 2 marks for A/ A0 = 0.08, answer 7010 days
connected for correct polarity A1 [2]
allow 1 mark for A/ A0 = 0.12, answer 5880 days)
(b) NS / NP = VS / VP © UCLES 2009 C1

V0 = √ 2 × Vrms C1
ratio = 9.0 / (√ 2 × 240)
= 1/38 or 1/37 or 0.027 A1 [3]
© UCLES 2010

gradient
change would be
in potential (6.4 × 10–19) / (4πε0 × 9 × 10–6)
= increased B1 [2]
energy = 1.6 × 10 × (6.4 × 10–19) / (4πε0 × 9 × 10–6)
–19
C1
= 1.0 × 10–22 J PA GE 173 A1 [4]
5 (a) region (of space) where there is a force M1
either on / produced by magnetic pole
3
5 (a) or on / produced
e.g. ‘storage by/current
of charge’ storagecarrying
of energyconductor / moving charge A1 [2]
blocking of direct current
producing of electrical oscillations
(b) (i) force on particle is (always) normal to velocity / direction of travel
smoothing B1
(anyspeed
two, 1ofmark
particle is constant
each) B1 B2 [2]
[2]
(ii) magnetic force provides the centripetal force B1
2
(b) (i) mv / r = Bqv of parallel combination = 60 µF
capacitance M1 C1
= mvcapacitance
rtotal / Bq = 20 µF A0 A1 [2]
[2]
(ii) p.d. across parallel combination = ½ × p.d. across single capacitor C1

(c) (i) direction
maximum from ‘bottom to top’ of diagram
is 9V B1 A1 [1]
[2]
(ii) radius proportional to momentum C1
ratio
(c) either = 5.7 /=7.4
energy ½CV 2 or energy = ½QV and Q = CV C1
= 0.77
energy = ½ × 4700 × 10–6 × (182 – 122) A1 C1 [2]
(answer must
= 0.42 J be consistent with direction given in (c)(i)) A1 [3]
64 (a) (i) to concentrate the (magnetic) flux / reduce flux losses B1 [1]
© UCLES
(ii) changing flux (in core) induces current in 2010
core M1
currents in core give rise to a heating effect A1 [2]
(b) (i) e.m.f. induced proportional to M1

rate of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1 [2]
(ii) magnetic flux in phase with / proportional to e.m.f. / current in primary coil M1
e.m.f. / p.d. across secondary proportional to rate of change of flux M1
so e.m.f. of supply not in phase with p.d. across secondary A0 [2]
(c) (i) for same power (transmission), high voltage with low current B1
with low current, less energy losses in transmission cables B1 [2]
(ii) voltage is easily / efficiently changed B1 [1]

greater change in separation of atoms/molecules M1
Page 4 greater change in volume
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus M1
Paper
identifies each difference PA GE
correctly 174
with
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/J uneand
∆U 2 0 1w
2 9 70 2 A141 [3]
6 (a) (i) peak voltage = 4.0 V A1 [1]

5
5 (a) (i) (induced) e.m.f. proportional to M1
rate ofvoltage
(ii) r.m.s. change(=of4.0/√2)
(magnetic)
= 2.8flux
V (linkage) / rate of flux cutting A1 A1 [2]
[1]
1. moving
(ii) period
(iii) magnet
T = 20 ms causes change of flux linkage M1 B1 [1]
2. speed of magnet 10–3) so varying rate of change of flux
frequency = 1 / (20 ×varies M1 B1 [1]
3. magnet changes
frequency = 50 Hz direction of motion (so current changes direction) A0 B1 [1]
[2]
period
(b) (i)
(b) = 0.75=s 4.0 – 2.4 = 1.6 V
change A1 C1 [1]
frequency = 1.33 Hz A1 [2]
(ii) ∆Q = C∆V or Q = CV C1
= 5.0 × 10–6 × 1.6 = 8.0 × 10–6 C A1 [2]
(c) graph: smooth correctly shaped curve with peak at f0 M1
A nevertime
(iii) discharge zero= 7 ms C1 A1 [2]
current = (8.0 × 10–6) / (7.0 × 10–3) M1
= 1.1(4) × 10–3 A A0 [2]
(d) (i) resonance B1 [1]
(ii) e.g.p.d.
(c) average quartz crystal
= 3.2 V for timing / production of ultrasound C1 A1 [1]
resistance = 3.2 / (1.1 × 10–3)
= 2900 Ω (allow 2800 Ω) A1 [2]
6 (a) (i) 2πf = 380 C1
frequency = 60 Hz A1 [2]
76 (a) sketch: concentric circles (minimum of 3 circles) M1
× √ 2 = I0 increasing with distance from wire
(ii) IRMSseparation A1 C1
= 9.9 /direction
IRMScorrect √2 B1 [3]
= 7.0 A A1 [2]
(b) (i) arrow direction from wire B towards wire A B1 [1]

(b) power = I2R C1
2
R =either
(ii) 400 / 7.0reference to Newton’s third law
=or
8.2 Ω force on each wire proportional to product of the two currents M1 A1 [2]
so forces are equal A1 [2]
(c) force always towards wire A/always in same direction B1

varies from zero (to a maximum value) (1)
variation is sinusoidal / sin2 (1)
(at) twice frequency of current (1)
(any two, one each) B2 [3]

8 (a) packet/quantum/discrete amount of energy M1
(allow 1 mark for ‘packet of electromagnetic radiation’)
energy = Planck constant × frequency (seen here or in b) B1 [3]
(b) each (coloured) line corresponds to one wavelength/frequency B1

energy = Planck constant × frequency
implies specific energy change between energy levels B1
so discrete levels A0 [2]

field strength ∝ 1 / (distance to centre of sphere)
(allow any sensible answer) B1
PA GE 175
difference:
e.g. 4gravitational force
Page Mark(always)
Scheme:towards sphereversion
Teachers’ Syllabus B1
Paper
electric force directionGCEdepends on sign
AS/A LEVEL – of charge
May/J uneon2 0 sphere
12 / towards9 or
70 2 42
away from sphere B1
75 (long) straight conductor
(a) e.g. gravitational field/forcecarrying current of 1 A
is attractive M1 (B1)
current/wire
electric normal
field/force to magnetic
is attractive field
or repulsive M1 (B1)
(for flux
(allow anydensity 1 T,)
sensible force per unit length is 1 N m–1
comparison) A1 [3][3]
–27
(i) (originally)
(b)gravitational
(c) forcedownward
= 1.67 × 10force ×on magnet (due to current)
9.81 B1
–26
by Newton’s =third
1.6 law
× 10(allowN “N3”) M1 A1
–19
upward
electric force
force = on10
1.6 × wire × 270 / (1.8 × 10–2) A1 C1 [3]
–15
= 2.4 × 10 N A1
(ii) F =
electric force very much greater than gravitational force
BIL B1 [4]
2.4 × 10–3 × 9.8 = B × 5.6 × 6.4 × 10–2 C1
B = 0.066 T (need 2 SF) A1 [2]
4 (a) force on(g missing
proton isscores
normal0/2,
to velocity
but g = 10andleading
field to 0.067T scores 1/2) M1
provides centripetal force (for circular motion) A1 [2]
new reading
(c) magnetic
(b) forceis=2.4√2
Bqv g C1 B1
either changes
centripetal mrω2 or +3.4
force =between mv2/r
g and –3.4 g B1
= rω total change is 6.8 g
v or A1 B1 [2]
Bqv = Bqrω = mrω2
ω = Bq/m A1 [4]
6 (a) oil drop charged by friction/beta source B1
between parallel metal plates B1
58 (a) either
platesφ=areBAhorizontal
sinθ (1) M1
adjustable
where A is the potential difference/field
area (through between
which flux plates
passes) B1
until oil drop is stationary B1
θ is the angle between B and (plane of) A A1
mg = q × V/d B1
or
symbols explained (1)
φ = BA (M1)
oil drop viewed through microscope (1)
where A is area normal to B (A1) [2]
m determined from terminal speed of drop (when p.d. is zero) (1)
(any two extras, 1 each) B2 [7]
(b) graph: VH constant and non zero between the poles and zero outside M1
sharp increase/decrease
–19 at ends of magnet A1 [2]
(b)
Page 3.2
4 × 10 C Mark Scheme Syllabus A1 Paper [1]
7 minimum
(a) (i)
(c) energy
(induced) to remove
e.m.f. an electron
proportional to from the metal/surface B1 M1 [1]
rate of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1 [2]
–15
gradient
(b) (ii) short=pulse
4.17 on× 10 (allow
entering and 4.1on→leaving
4.3) region between poles C1 M1
–15 –19 –15
h =pulses
4.15 × approximately
10 × 1.6 × 10 or
the same shape h = 4.1
but to 4.3 × 10
opposite eV s
polarities A1 A1
–34
=e.m.f.
6.6 × 10 Js ©
zero between Cambridge International
poles and outside Examinations 2012 A0 A1 [2]
[3]
6 (a) graph:
(c) (i) straighttoline
connection parallel
‘top’ to given
of resistor line as positive
labelled B1 [1]
with intercept at any higher frequency B1
(ii) diodeintercept at between
B and diode D 6.9 × 1014 Hz and 7.1 × 1014 Hz B1 B1 [3]
[1]
(b) (i) VP = 4.0 V C1

mean power = VP2/2R C1
= 42 / (2 × 2700)
= 2.96 × 10–3 W A1 [3]
(ii) capacitor, correct symbol, connected in parallel with R B1 [1]

(c) graph: half-wave rectification M1
same period and© same
University
peakof value
Cambridge International Examinations 2012 A1 [2]
4 (a) e.g. store energy (do not allow ‘store charge’)
2. graph: line always between given lines M1
in smoothing circuits
crosses
d.c.x-axis between 11.0 µm and 12.3 µm A1
blocking
reasonable shape for PA GE 176
curve A1 [3]
in oscillators
any sensible suggestions, one each, max. 2 B2 [2]
59 (a) (i) field shown as right to left B1 [1]
(b) (i) potential across each capacitor is the same and Q = CV B1 [1]
(ii) lines are more spaced out at ends B1 [1]
(ii) total charge Q = Q1 + Q2 + Q3 M1
CV = C1V + C2V + C3V M1
(b) Hall voltage
(allow Qdepends
= CV hereon or
angle
in (i)) M1
eithersobetween field and
C = C1 + C2 + C3 plane of probe A0 [2]
or maximum when field normal to plane of probe
or zero when field parallel to plane of probe A1 [2]
(c) (i)
(c) (i) (induced) e.m.f. proportional to rate M1
of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1 [2]
(allow rate of cutting of flux)
A1 [1]
(ii) e.g. move coil towards/away from solenoid
(ii) e.g. rotate coil
e.g. vary current in solenoid
e.g. insert iron core into solenoid
(any three sensible suggestions, 1 each) B3 [3]
A1 [1]
10
5 (a) (i) region (of space)
either where a moving charge (may) experience a force
or around a ©magnet where another magnet experiences a force
Cambridge International Examinations 2013
B1 [1]
(ii) (Φ =) BA sinθ A1 [1]
(b) (i) plane of frame is always parallel to BV / flux linkage always zero B1 [1]
(ii) ∆Φ = 1.8 × 10–5 × 52 × 10–2 × 95 × 10–2 C1

= 8.9 × 10–6 Wb A1 [2]
(c) (i) (induced) e.m.f. proportional to rate of M1

change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1 [2]
(ii) e.m.f. = (8.9 × 10–6) / 0.30

= 3.0 × 10–5 V A1 [1]
(iii) This question part was removed from the assessment. All candidates were
awarded 1 mark. B1 [1]

(c) q = 4πε0Vx PA GE 177
q = 4π × 8.85 × 10 × 180 × 1.0 × 10–2
–12
M1
= 2.0 × 10–10 C A1 [2]
12
6 (a) F = BILsinθ C1
= 2.6 × 10–3 × 5.4 × 4.7 × 10–2 × sin 34°
= 3.69 × 10–4 N A1 [2]
(allow 1 mark for use of cos 34°)
(b) peak current = 1.7 × √2 C1

= 2.4 A
max. force = 2.6 × 10–3 × 2.4 × 4.7 × 10–2 × sin 34°

= 1.64 × 10–4 N C1
variation = 2 × 1.64 × 10–4

= 3.3 × 10–4 N A1 [3]

PA×GE
(b) VH = (0.13 × 3.8) / (6.0 × 1028 × 0.10 178
10–3 × 1.60 × 10–19) C1
= 5.1 × 10–7 V A1 [2]
13 (a) (non-uniform) magnetic flux in core is changing

10 M1
induces (different) e.m.f. in (different parts of) the core A1
(eddy) currents form in the core M1
which give rise to heating

Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus A1
Paper[4]
Cambridge International AS/A
(b) as magnet falls, tube cuts magnetic fluxLevel – May/June 2016 9702 42
M1
9 (a) (i) number density

e.m.f./(eddy) of charge
currents inducedcarriers/free electrons
in metal/aluminium (tube) A1
or © Cambridge International Examinations 2016
number
(eddy) perheating
current unit volume of charge carriers/free electrons
of tube B1
M1 [1]
withPX
(ii) or QYtaken
energy or RZfrom falling magnet B1
A1 [1]
or
(b) (i) VH is inversely proportional to n B1
(eddy) currents produce magnetic field (M1)
for semiconductors, n is (much) smaller than for metals B1 [2]
that opposes motion of magnet (A1)
(ii) magnetic field would deflect holes and electrons in same direction B1
so magnet B has acceleration < g
or (because) electrons are (–)ve, holes are (+)ve M1
magnet B has smaller acceleration/reaches terminal speed A1 [5]
so VH has opposite polarity/opposite sign A1 [3]
11 (a) period = 15 ms C1
14
10 (a) iron rod changes flux (density)/field B1
frequency (= 1 / T) = 67 Hz A1 [2]
change of flux in coil Q causes induced e.m.f. B1 [2]
(b) zero A1 [1]

(b) constant reading (either polarity) from time zero to near t1 B1
(c) spike
Ir.m.s. in=one
I0 / direction
√2 near t1 clearly showing a larger voltage M1
C1
of opposite
= 0.53polarity
A A1
A1 [2]
zero reading from near t1 to t2 B1 [4]

(d) energy = Ir.m.s.2 × R × t or ½ I0 2 × R × t
or
11 (a) point
power = Ir.m.s.2at× ‘lower
P shown R and end’energy
of load= power × t B1
C1 [1]
energy = 0.532 × 450 × 30 × 10–3

(b) Vr.m.s. = 6.0 / √2 = 4.24 V C1
= 3.8 J A1 [2]
Ir.m.s. = 4.24 / (2.4 × 103)
= 1.8 × 10–3 A A1 [2]
12 (a) (in a solid electrons in) neighbouring atoms are close together
(and influence/interact with each other) M1
(c) (i) capacitor in parallel with load B1 [1]
this changes their electron energy levels M1
(ii) line from peak to curve at 3.0 V for either half- or full-wave rectified M1
CEDAR COLLEGE
(many atoms in lattice) cause a spread of energy levels into a band PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
A1 [3]
correct curvature on line (gradient becoming more shallow) A1
line drawn as for full-wave rectified A1 [3]

PA GE 179
MAGNETISM 

PA GE 18 0

13
(ii) Calculate the flux density between the poles. For

Examiner’s
Use
flux density = ............................................ T [3]
(c) The direct current in (b) is now replaced by a very low frequency sinusoidal current of
r.m.s. value 2.6 A.
Calculate the variation in the reading of the top-pan balance.
variation in reading = ............................................ g [2]

PA GE 181

12
6 The current in a long, straight vertical wire is in the direction XY, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
Y
D C
A B
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, sketch the pattern of the magnetic flux in the horizontal plane ABCD due to
the current-carrying wire. Draw at least four flux lines. [3]
(b) The current-carrying wire is within the Earth’s magnetic field. As a result, the pattern drawn
in Fig. 6.1 is superposed with the horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field.
Fig. 6.2 shows a plan view of the plane ABCD with the current in the wire coming out of
the plane.
D C
magnetic field current out of

of Earth plane ABCD
A B
Fig. 6.2
The horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field is also shown.

© UCLES 2009 9702/41/O/N/09

PA GE 182
13
(i) On Fig. 6.2, mark with the letter P a point where the magnetic field due to the For
current-carrying wire could be equal and opposite to that of the Earth. [1] Examiner’s
Use
(ii) For a long, straight wire carrying current I, the magnetic flux density B at distance r
from the centre of the wire is given by the expression
I
B = μ0
2πr
where μ 0 is the permeability of free space.
The point P in (i) is found to be 1.9 cm from the centre of the wire for a current of
1.7 A.
Calculate a value for the horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic flux density.
flux density = ............................................ T [2]
(c) The current in the wire in (b)(ii) is increased. The point P is now found to be 2.8 cm from
the wire.
Determine the new current in the wire.
current = ............................................ A [2]

PA GE 183
(a) On Fig. 5.2, For

Examiner’s
(i) draw four field lines to represent the pattern of the magnetic field around wire X due Use
solely to the current in wire X, [2]
(ii) draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on wire Y due to the magnetic field
of wire X. [1]
(b) The magnetic flux density B at a distance x from a long straight wire due to a current I in
the wire is given by the expression
B=
!0I ,
2!x
where !0 is the permeability of free space.
The current in wire X is 5.0 A and that in wire Y is 7.0 A. The separation of the wires is
2.5 cm.
(i) Calculate the force per unit length on wire Y due to the current in wire X.
force per unit length = ...................................... N m–1 [4]
(ii) The currents in the wires are not equal.
State and explain whether the forces on the two wires are equal in magnitude.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]

PA GE 184
7 Negatively-charged particles are moving through a vacuum in a parallel beam. The particles For
have speed v. Examiner’s
The particles enter a region of uniform magnetic field of flux density 930 μT. Initially, the Use
particles are travelling at right-angles to the magnetic field. The path of a single particle is
shown in Fig. 7.1.
negatively-charged
arc of radius 7.9 cm
particles, speed v
uniform magnetic field,
flux density 930 μT
Fig. 7.1
The negatively-charged particles follow a curved path of radius 7.9 cm in the magnetic field.
A uniform electric field is then applied in the same region as the magnetic field. For an electric
field strength of 12 kV m–1, the particles are undeviated as they pass through the region of
the fields.
(a) On Fig. 7.1, mark with an arrow the direction of the electric field. [1]
(b) Calculate, for the negatively-charged particles,
(i) the speed v,
v = ....................................... m s–1 [3]

charge
(ii) the ratio .
mass
ratio = .................................... C kg–1 [3]

PA GE 185
6 (a) A uniform magnetic field has constant flux density B. A straight wire of fixed length For
carries a current I at an angle θ to the magnetic field, as shown in Fig. 6.1. Examiner’s
Use
magnetic field
flux density B
I
current-carrying
wire
Fig. 6.1
(i) The current I in the wire is changed, keeping the angle θ constant.
On Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with current I of the force F on the
wire.
0
0 I
Fig. 6.2
[2]

© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10
PA GE 186
13
(ii) The angle θ between the wire and the magnetic field is now varied. The current I is For
kept constant. Examiner’s
On Fig. 6.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with angle θ of the force F on the Use
wire.
0
0 30 60 90
/°
Fig. 6.3 [3]
(b) A uniform magnetic field is directed at right-angles to the rectangular surface PQRS of a
slice of a conducting material, as shown in Fig. 6.4.
Q R
direction of
movement
P S
of electrons
Fig. 6.4
Electrons, moving towards the side SR, enter the slice of conducting material. The
electrons enter the slice at right-angles to side SR.
(i) Explain why, initially, the electrons do not travel in straight lines across the slice
from side SR to side PQ.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Explain to which side, PS or QR, the electrons tend to move.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]

PA GE 187
5 Positive ions are travelling through a vacuum in a narrow beam. The ions enter a region of For
uniform magnetic field of flux density B and are deflected in a semi-circular arc, as shown in Examiner’s
Fig. 5.1. Use
detector uniform magnetic

field
12.8 cm
beam of
positive ions
Fig. 5.1
The ions, travelling with speed 1.40 × 105 m s–1, are detected at a fixed detector when the
diameter of the arc in the magnetic field is 12.8 cm.
(a) By reference to Fig. 5.1, state the direction of the magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The ions have mass 20 u and charge +1.6 × 10–19 C. Show that the magnetic flux density
is 0.454 T. Explain your working.
[3]

© UCLES 2010 9702/41/O/N/10
PA GE 188
13
(c) Ions of mass 22 u with the same charge and speed as those in (b) are also present in For
the beam. Examiner’s
Use
(i) On Fig. 5.1, sketch the path of these ions in the magnetic field of magnetic flux
density 0.454 T. [1]
(ii) In order to detect these ions at the fixed detector, the magnetic flux density is
changed.
Calculate this new magnetic flux density.
magnetic flux density = ............................................. T [2]

PA GE 189

14
5 The poles of a horseshoe magnet measure 5.0 cm × 2.4 cm, as shown in Fig. 5.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
direction of
A movement
of wire
copper wire
5.0 cm
2.4 cm pole piece

of magnet
Fig. 5.1
The uniform magnetic flux density between the poles of the magnet is 89 mT. Outside the
region of the poles, the magnetic flux density is zero.
A stiff copper wire is connected to a sensitive ammeter of resistance 0.12 Ω. A student moves
the wire at a constant speed of 1.8 m s–1 between the poles in a direction parallel to the faces
of the poles.
(a) Calculate the magnetic flux between the poles of the magnet.
magnetic flux = .......................................... Wb [2]
(b) (i) Use your answer in (a) to determine, for the wire moving between the poles of the
magnet, the e.m.f. induced in the wire.
e.m.f. = ............................................. V [3]

© UCLES 2010 9702/43/O/N/10
PA GE 19 0
15
(ii) Show that the reading on the ammeter is approximately 70 mA. For
Examiner’s
Use
[1]
(c) By reference to Lenz’s law, a force acts on the wire to oppose the motion of the wire.
The student who moved the wire between the poles of the magnet claims not to have
felt this force.
Explain quantitatively a reason for this claim.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]

PA GE 191
5 Positively charged particles are travelling in a vacuum through three narrow slits S1, S2 and For
S3, as shown in Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
S1 S2 S3
beam of
charged
particles
direction of
electric field
Fig. 5.1
Each particle has speed v and charge q.

There is a uniform magnetic field of flux density B and a uniform electric field of field strength
E in the region between the slits S2 and S3.
(a) State the expression for the force F acting on a charged particle due to
(i) the magnetic field,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the electric field.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The electric field acts downwards in the plane of the paper, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
State and explain the direction of the magnetic field so that the positively charged
particles may pass undeviated through the region between slits S2 and S3.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2011 9702/41/O/N/11
PA GE 192
6 (a) Define the tesla. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A charged particle of mass m and charge +q is travelling with velocity v in a vacuum. It
enters a region of uniform magnetic field of flux density B as shown in Fig. 6.1.
particle
mass m, charge +q

flux density B
Fig. 6.1
The magnetic field is normal to the direction of motion of the particle. The path of the
particle in the field is the arc of a circle of radius r.
(i) Explain why the path of the particle in the field is the arc of a circle.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Show that the radius r is given by the expression
mv .
r =
Bq
[1]

© UCLES 2011 9702/43/O/N/11
PA GE 193
13
(c) A uniform magnetic field is produced in the region PQRS, as shown in Fig. 6.2. For
Examiner’s
Use
P Q
uniform
magnetic field
S R
Fig. 6.2
The magnetic field is normal to the page.

At point X, a gamma-ray photon interaction causes two particles to be formed. The paths
of these particles are shown in Fig. 6.2.
(i) Suggest, with a reason, why each of the paths is a spiral, rather than the arc of a
circle.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) State and explain what can be deduced from the paths about
1. the charges on the two particles,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
2. the initial speeds of the two particles.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

PA GE 194
4 A proton of mass m and charge +q is travelling through a vacuum in a straight line with For
speed v. Examiner’s
It enters a region of uniform magnetic field of magnetic flux density B, as shown in Fig. 4.1. Use
region of
uniform
magnetic field
proton
mass m
charge +q
v
Fig. 4.1
The magnetic field is normal to the direction of motion of the proton.
(a) Explain why the path of the proton in the magnetic field is an arc of a circle.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The angular speed of the proton in the magnetic field is ω.

Derive an expression for ω in terms of B, q and m.
[4]

PA GE 195

12
5 A uniform magnetic field of flux density B makes an angle θ with a flat plane PQRS, as For
Use
Q
P
magnetic field
flux density B
S
Fig. 5.1
The plane PQRS has area A.
(a) State
(i) what is meant by a magnetic field,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) an expression, in terms of A, B and θ, for the magnetic flux Φ through the plane
PQRS.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A vertical aluminium window frame DEFG has width 52 cm and length 95 cm, as shown
in Fig. 5.2.
52 cm
E
hinge D
95 cm
hinge
F
G
Fig. 5.2
The frame is hinged along the vertical edge DG.

The horizontal component BH of the Earth’s magnetic field is 1.8 × 10–5 T. For the closed
window, the frame is normal to the horizontal component BH.
The window is opened so that the plane of the window rotates through 90°.
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/O/N/13

PA GE 196

14
6 A particle has mass m and charge +q and is travelling with speed v through a vacuum. For
The initial direction of travel is parallel to the plane of two charged horizontal metal plates, as Examiner’s
shown in Fig. 6.1. Use
+V
metal plate
path of particle
metal plate
Fig. 6.1
The uniform electric field between the plates has magnitude 2.8 × 104 V m–1 and is zero
outside the plates.
The particle passes between the plates and emerges beyond them, as illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
(a) Explain why the path of the particle in the electric field is not an arc of a circle.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A uniform magnetic field is now formed in the region between the metal plates. The
magnetic field strength is adjusted so that the positively charged particle passes
undeviated between the plates, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
+V
region of uniform
electric and magnetic
fields
path of particle path of particle
Fig. 6.2

© UCLES 2013 9702/43/O/N/13
PA GE 197
15
(i) State and explain the direction of the magnetic field. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The particle has speed 4.7 × 105 m s–1.

Calculate the magnitude of the magnetic flux density.
Explain your working.
magnetic flux density = ............................................. T [3]
(c) The particle in (b) has mass m, charge +q and speed v.

Without any further calculation, state the effect, if any, on the path of a particle that has
(i) mass m, charge –q and speed v,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) mass m, charge +q and speed 2v,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) mass 2m, charge +q and speed v.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

PA GE 198

10
5 A Hall probe is placed a distance d from a long straight current-carrying wire, as illustrated in
Fig. 5.1.
current-carrying 4.0 A
wire
Hall probe
X Y
Fig. 5.1
The direct current in the wire is 4.0 A. Line XY is normal to the wire.
The Hall probe is rotated about the line XY to the position where the reading VH of the Hall probe
is maximum.
(a) The Hall probe is now moved away from the wire, along the line XY.
On the axes of Fig. 5.2, sketch a graph to show the variation of the Hall voltage VH with
distance x of the probe from the wire. Numerical values are not required on your sketch.
VH
0
0 d x
Fig. 5.2
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

PA GE 199
11
(b) The Hall probe is now returned to its original position, a distance d from the wire.
At this point, the magnetic flux density due to the current in the wire is proportional to the
current.
For a direct current of 4.0 A in the wire, the reading of the Hall probe is 3.5 mV.
The direct current is now replaced by an alternating current of root-mean-square (r.m.s.)
value 4.0 A. The period of this alternating current is T.
On the axes of Fig. 5.3, sketch the variation with time t of the reading of the Hall voltage VH for
two cycles of the alternating current. Give numerical values for VH, where appropriate.
6
VH / mV
4
0
0 T 2T t
–2
–4
–6
Fig. 5.3
[3]
(c) A student suggests that the Hall probe in (a) is replaced with a small coil connected in series
with a millivoltmeter. The constant current in the wire is 4.0 A.
In order to obtain data to plot a graph showing the variation with distance x of the magnetic
flux density, the student suggests that readings of the millivoltmeter are taken when the coil is
held in position at different values of x.
Comment on this suggestion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

PA GE 20 0
7 A solenoid is connected in series with a battery and a switch. A Hall probe is placed close to one
end of the solenoid, as illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
solenoid
Hall probe
Fig. 7.1
The current in the solenoid is switched on. The Hall probe is adjusted in position to give the
maximum reading. The current is then switched off.
(a) The current in the solenoid is now switched on again. Several seconds later, it is switched off.
The Hall probe is not moved.
On the axes of Fig. 7.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the Hall voltage VH.
VH
0
t
current current
Fig. 7.2
[3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

PA GE 201
15
(b) The Hall probe is now replaced by a small coil. The plane of the coil is parallel to the end of
the solenoid.
(i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) On the axes of Fig. 7.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the e.m.f. E
induced in the coil when the current in the solenoid is switched on and then switched off.
0
t
current current
Fig. 7.3
[3]

PA GE 202
6 (a) State the type of field, or fields, that may cause a force to be exerted on a particle that is
(i) uncharged and moving,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) charged and stationary,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) charged and moving at right-angles to the field.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A particle X has mass 3.32 × 10−26 kg and charge +1.60 × 10−19 C.
The particle is travelling in a vacuum with speed 7.60 × 104 m s−1. It enters a region of uniform
magnetic field that is normal to the direction of travel of the particle. The particle travels in a
semicircle of diameter 12.2 cm, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
region of
uniform magnetic
field
12.2 cm
path of
particle X
Fig. 6.1
For the uniform magnetic field,
(i) state its direction,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

PA GE 203
15
(ii) calculate the magnetic flux density.
magnetic flux density = ..................................................... T [3]
(c) A second particle Y has mass less than that of particle X in (b) and the same charge.
It enters the region of uniform magnetic field in (b) with the same speed and along the same
initial path as particle X.
On Fig. 6.1, draw the path of particle Y in the region of the magnetic field. [1]
7 In many distribution systems for electrical energy, the energy is transmitted using alternating
current at high voltages.
Suggest and explain an advantage, one in each case, for the use of
(a) alternating voltages,
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) high voltages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

PA GE 20 4
13 During magnetic resonance imaging to obtain information about internal body structures, a large
constant magnetic field is used with a calibrated non-uniform magnetic field superimposed on it.
(a) State and explain the purpose of
(i) the large constant magnetic field,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) the non-uniform magnetic field.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The de-excitation energy E (measured in joule) of a proton in magnetic resonance imaging is
given by the expression
E = 2.82 × 10−26 B
where B is the magnetic flux density measured in tesla.

The energy E is emitted as a photon of electromagnetic radiation in the radio-frequency
range.
Calculate the magnetic flux density required for the radio frequency to be 42 MHz.
magnetic flux density = ..................................................... T [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

...................................................................................................................................................
PA GE 20 5
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
7 (a) A solenoid is connected in series with a resistor, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
N S
motion of magnet
Fig. 7.1
As the magnet is being moved into the solenoid, thermal energy is transferred in the resistor.
Use laws of electromagnetic induction to explain the origin of this thermal energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain why the alternating current in the primary coil of a transformer is not in phase with the
alternating e.m.f. induced in the secondary coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]

PA GE 20 6
9 A thin rectangular slice of aluminium has sides of length 65 mm, 50 mm and 0.10 mm, as shown in
Fig. 9.1.
direction of
magnetic field
Z Y
0.10 mm
50 mm
X
current
3.8 A
Q R
P S
65 mm
Fig. 9.1 (not to scale)
Some of the corners of the slice are labelled.
A current I of 3.8 A is normal to face RSXY of the slice.
In aluminium, the number of free electrons per unit volume is 6.0 × 1028 m−3.
A uniform magnetic field of magnetic flux density B equal to 0.13 T is normal to face QRYZ of the
aluminium slice in the direction from Q to P.
A Hall voltage VH is developed across the slice and is given by the expression
VH = BI .
ntq
(a) Use Fig. 9.1 to state the magnitude of the distance t.
t = ................................................. mm [1]
(b) Calculate the magnitude of the Hall voltage VH.
VH = ..................................................... V [2]
[Total: 3]

PA GE 207
9 A magnetic field of flux density B is normal to face PQRS of a slice of a conducting material, as
shown in Fig. 9.1.
magnetic field
flux density
S
R
Z I
P Q
X Y
Fig. 9.1
A current I in the slice is normal to face QRZY of the slice.
The Hall voltage VH across the slice is given by the expression
BI
VH = .
ntq
(a) (i) State what is represented by the symbol n.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The symbol t represents the length of one side of the slice. Use letters from Fig. 9.1 to
identify t.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) In general, the Hall voltage produced in a slice of a metal is very small.
For a slice of the same dimensions with the same current and magnetic flux density, the
Hall voltage produced in a semiconductor material is much larger.
Suggest and explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

PA GE 20 8
19
(ii) In some semiconducting materials, electrons are mainly responsible for conduction.
In other semiconducting materials, holes are mainly responsible for conduction.
Suggest and explain the difference, if any, that conduction by electrons or by holes will
have on the Hall voltage.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]

6 (a) unit of magnetic flux density / magnetic field strength B1
(uniform) field normal to wire carrying current of 1 A M1
giving force (per unit length) of 1 NPA
mGE
–1 20 9 A1 [3]
ANSWERS
Page 4 force on magnet
(b) (i) Mark/Scheme:
balance isTeachers’
downwardsversion
(so by Newton’s third Syllabus
law) PaperB1
GCE A/AS LEVEL
force on wire is upwards – October/November 2009 9702 41 M1
pole P is a north pole A1 [3]
5 (a) work done per / on unit positive charge .....................................................................M1
1 moving charge from infinity to the point ..................................................................... A1 [2]
(ii) F = BIL and F = mg (g missing, then 0/3 in (ii)) C1
–3 –2
2.3 × 10 × 9.8 = B × 2.6 × 4.4 × 10 (g = 10, loses this mark) C1
B = 0.20 T A1 [3]
(b) (i) α-particle and gold nucleus repel each other ..................................................... B1
all kinetic energy of α-particle converted into electric potential energy .............. B1 [2]
(c) reading for maximum current = 2.3 × √2 -19 2 C1
(ii)total
1 variation
potential energy = (79
= 2 × 2.3 {1.6 × 10 } ) / (4π × 8.85 × 10-12 × d) .............. C1
× √2× 2 × -13
kinetic energy = 4.8
= 6.5 g × 1.6 × 10 = 7.68 × 10-13 J ........................................... C1 A1 [2]
-14
equating to give d = 4.7 × 10 m ..................................................................... A1 [3]
7 coil(ii) 2 F =
in series with / 4πε0(do
Qqmeter d ×not 1/d = 7.68
allow × 10-13of×a1cell)
inclusion / (4.7 × 10-14) .............................. C1 B1
push known pole = 16into
N coil
....................................................................................................... A1 B1[2]
observe current direction (not reading) B1
(induced) field / field from coil repels magnet [Total:
B19]
either states rule to determine direction of magnetic field in coil
2
6
or reversing magnet direction gives opposite deflection on meter
(a) concentric circles …(at least three lines) ................................................................M1
B1
direction of induced current such as to oppose the change producing it B1 [6]
with increasing separation ......................................................................................... A1
correct direction clear ................................................................................................ B1 [3]
8 (a) wave theory predicts any frequency would give rise to emission of electron M1
(b) (i)if exposure time is to
correct position sufficiently
left of wirelong
.............................................................................. B1 A1[1]
photon has (specific value of) energy dependent on frequency M1
(ii)emission
B = (4π if ×energy greater
10-7 × 1.7) / (2πthan
× 1.9threshold / work function / energy to removeC1
× 10-2) .............................................................
electron from surface
-5 A1 [4]
= 1.8 × 10 T ................................................................................................. A1 [2]

(c) distance ∝ current radiation
of electromagnetic ................................................................................................... C1 A1
current
(photon)= energy
(2.8 / 1.9)
= ×h 1.7
× frequency B1 [3]
= 2.5 A ........................................................................................................ A1 [2]
[Total: 8]
where p is the momentum (of the particle) A1 [3]
7 (a) e.g. more (output) power available
e.g. less ripple for same smoothing capacitor
9 (a) any ∆N / ∆t suggestion
(i) sensible (ignore any sign)
............................................................................................ B1 B1[1] [1]
(ii) ∆N / N (ignore any sign) B1 [1]
(b) (i) curve showing half-wave rectification ................................................................. B1 [1]
(b)(ii)source must
similar decay
to (i) by 8%shift of 180° .................................................................... B1
but phase C1[1]
A = A0 exp(–ln2 t / T½) or A/ A0 = 1 / (2t/T) C1
0.92 = exp(–ln2 × t / 5.27) or 0.92 = 1 / (2t/5.27 ) C1
(c) (i)t = 0.634symbol,
correct years connected in parallel with R ...................................................... B1 [1]
= 230 days A1 [4]
(ii)(allow 2 marks
1 larger for A/ /Asecond
capacitor 0 = 0.08, answerin7010
capacitor days
parallel with R ..................................... B1 [1]
allow 1 mark for
(not increase R) A/ A0 = 0.12, answer 5880 days)
2 same peak values ........................................................................................... B1
correct shape giving less ripple © ..........................................................................
UCLES 2009 B1 [2]
[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2009
V = 6.0 × 10 V ................................................................................................. A1 [3]
(use of 0.75 rather than 0.25, allow max 2 marks)
PA GE 210
[Total: 8]
3
5 (a) (i) concentric circles, anticlockwise ……(minimum 3 circles) ..............................M1
separation of lines increases with distance from wire ........................................ A1 [2]
(ii) direction from Y towards X ................................................................................. A1 [1]
(b) (i) flux density at wire Y = (4π × 10-7 × 5.0) / (2π × 2.5 × 10-2) ............................... C1
= 4.0 × 10-5 T .................................................................. C1
force per unit length = BI
= 4.0 × 10-5 × 7.0 ............................................................. C1
= 2.8 × 10-4 N .................................................................. A1 [4]
(ii) either force depends on product of the currents in the two wires .....................M1
so equal .................................................................................................. A1
or (isolated system so) Newton’s 3rd law applies ..................................... (M1)
so equal ................................................................................................(A1) [2]
[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2009
74 (a) arrow pointing up the page B1 [1]
(b) (i) Eq = Bqv C1

v = (12 × 103) / (930 × 10–6) C1
= 1.3 × 107 m s–1 A1 [3]
(ii) Bqv = mv 2 / r C1
q/m = (1.3 × 107) / (7.9 × 10–2 × 930 × 10–6) C1
= 1.8 × 1011 C kg–1 A1 [3]
8 (a) momentum
Page 4 conservation hence momenta
Mark Scheme: of photons
Teachers’ versionare equal (butSyllabus
opposite) M1
Paper
same momentum GCE
so same energy
AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2 0 1 0 9702 A1
42 [2]
56 (a) (i) straight line with positive gradient M1

2
(b) (i) (∆)E = (∆)mc
through origin C1
A1 [2]
= 1.2 × 10–28 × (3.0 × 108)2
–11
(ii) maximum= 1.08 × 10shown
force J at θ = 90° A1
M1 [2]
zero force shown at θ = 0° M1
(ii) Ereasonable
= hc / curve
λ with F about ½ max at 30° A1 [3]
λ = (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108) / (1.08 × 10–11) C1
= 1.84 × 10–14 m A1 [2]
(b) (i) force on electron due to magnetic field B1
(iii) λforce =onhelectron
/p normal to magnetic field and direction of electron B1 [2]
p = (6.63 × 10–34) / (1.84 × 10–14) C1
3.6 × 10–20
(ii) quote=/ mention of (Fleming’s)
Ns left hand rule M1
A1 [2]
electron moves towards QR A1 [2]
Section B
7 (a) either the value of steady / constant voltage M1
9 that produces
(a) (i) point X shown correctly same power (in a resistor) as the alternating voltage A1 [1]
B1 [2]
or if alternating voltage is squared and averaged (M1)
(ii) op-ampthe has
r.m.s. value
very largeis /the square
infinite gainroot of this averaged value (A1)
M1
CEDAR COLLEGE non-inverting input is at earth (potential) / earthed / at 0 V PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
M1
if amplifier is not to saturate, inverting input must be (almost)
(b) (i) at
220 V potential / 0 (V) same potential as inverting input
earth A1 [3]
A1 [1]
(ii) 156 V A1 [1]

Page 4 PA GE 211 version
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ Syllabus Paper
56 (a) field into (the plane of) the paper B1 [1]
(b) force due to magnetic field provides the centripetal force B1

mv2 / r = Bqv C1
Page
B 3 = (20 × 1.66 ×Mark
10–27 Scheme: Teachers’
× 1.40 × 10 5
) / (1.6 × version
10–19 × 6.4 × 10–2) Syllabus Paper
B1
= 0.454 TGCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9702 41 [3]
A0
3 (a) (i) amplitude remains constant B1 [1]
(c) (i) semicircle with diameter greater than 12.8 cm B1 [1]
(ii) amplitude decreases gradually M1
light damping 22 A1 [2]
(ii) new flux density = × 0.454 C1
20
(iii) period = 0.80Bs = 0.499 T C1
A1 [2]
frequency = 1.25 Hz (period not 0.8 s, then 0/2) A1 [2]
6 (a) (i) e.g. prevent flux losses / improve flux linkage B1 [1]
Page
(b) (i) 4 (induced) e.m.f. Mark Scheme: Teachers’
is proportional to version Syllabus Paper
M1
rateinofcore
(ii) flux GCE
change/cuttingA LEVEL – October/November
is changingof (magnetic) flux (linkage) 2010 9702 43
A1
B1 [2]
e.m.f. / current (induced) in core B1
75 magnetic
(a) (ii) a currentfluxcurrent
is=induced
BA in core in the coil –2 M1
induced –3 causes heating B1 [3]
= 89
as magnet moves in coil × 10 × 5.0 × 10 × 2.4 × 10–2 C1
A1
= 1.07 ×gives
current in resistor 10–4 rise
Wb to a heating effect A1
M1 [2]
(b) (i) thatthermal
value energy
of theisdirect
derived fromproducing
current energy of same
oscillation of the
(mean) magnet
power / heating A1
M1 [4]
in a resistor A1 [2]
(b) (i) e.m.f. = ∆φ / ∆t C1
–4
4 (a) (ii) (for ∆φ
zero
(i) power field =(strength)
1.07 × =10inside
in primary Wb),spheres
power in∆t = 2.4 × 10–2 / 1.8 = 1.33 × 10–2 s
secondary C1
B1
M1 [1]
Ve.m.f.
P I P = VS IS
= (1.07 × 10 ) / (1.33 × 10–2)
–4
A1 [2]
(ii) either field = 8.0 × 10–3isV zero
strength A1 [3]
or the fields are–3in opposite directions M1
7 (a) (i) current
(ii) e.g. at=a8.0
electron × 10
/ particle
point /diffraction
between 0.12the spheres M1
B1
A1 [1]
[2]
≈ 70 mA A0 [1]
(ii) e.g. photoelectric effect B1 [1]
(b) (i) field strength is (–) potential gradient (not V/x) B1 [1]
(c) force on wire = BIL
–3
(b) (ii)
(i)
= 8961.× 10 70 × 10–3has
field× strength × 5.0 × 10–2 value
maximum A1
C1
B1 [1]
≈ 3 × 10–4 at (N)
x = 11.4 cm M1
B1 [2]
(ii) change
suitable in energy
comment e.g.=this × 10is–19too
4.57force J / very small (to be felt) A1 [3]
λ2.= hc / Estrength is zero
field C1
B1
–34 8 –19
= (6.63 × 10at
either x× =3.07.9
× 10 cm) (allow
/ (4.57±0.3
× 10cm))
–7 2
6 = 4.4
(a) power / heating
or× 10 m
depends
at 0 to 1.4on cmI or 11.4 cm to 12 cm A1
M1
B1 [2]
[2]
so independent of current direction A1 [2]
88 (a) splitting of a heavy nucleus (not atom/nuclide) M1
5 (a) (i) Bqv(sinθ) or Bqv(cosθ) B1 [1]
(b) into two (lighter) nuclei of approximately
either maximum power = I 2R or average same mass
power = I 2
R A1
M1 [2]
0 RMS
I0 = qE
(ii) √2 × IRMS B1
M1 [1]
(b) 01maximum
n power = 2 × average power
4ratio = 0.5
2 He (allow 42 α ) A1
M2 [3]
(b) F 7 B must be opposite in direction to FE B1
3
soLi magnetic field into plane of paper A1
B1 [3]
[2]
7 (a) force due to E-field is equal and opposite to force due to B-field B1
Eq = Bqv B1
(c) emitted
v = E/Bparticles have kinetic energy B1
B1 [3]
range of particles in the control rods is short / particles stopped in rods /
lose kinetic energy in rods B1
(b) kinetic
either energy of and
charge particles
massconverted to thermal
are not involved energy
in the equation in (a) B1 [3]
or FE and FB are both doubled
CEDAR COLLEGE
or E, B and v do not change © UCLES 2010 PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
M1
so no deviation A1 [2]
Page
(ii)3 larger capacitance produces
Mark more
Schemesmoothing Syllabus Paper
M1
GCE AS/A LEVEL
either product RC larger – October/November 2012 9702 43
or for the same load PA GE 212 A1 [2]
3 (a) (i) (tangent to line gives) direction of force on a (small test) mass B1 [1]
96 unit (tangent
(a) (ii) to line
of magnetic fluxgives) direction of force on a (small test) charge
density M1
B1
charge is positive
field normal to (straight) conductor carrying current of 1 A A1
M1 [2]
force per unit length is 1 N m–1 A1 [3]
(b) similarity:
(b) e.g.
(i) radial
force onfields
particle always normal to direction of motion M1
lines (and
normalspeedsurface
to of particle is constant)
Page 3 magnetic forceofprovides
greater separation lines with increased
Mark
the Scheme
centripetaldistance
force2 from sphere Syllabus Paper
A1 [2]
field strength ∝GCE 1 / (distance to centre of sphere)
A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9702 43
(allow 2 sensible answer)
any B1
(ii) mv /r = Bqv M1
4 (a) e.g. store energy (do not allow ‘store charge’)
r = mv/Bq A0 [1]
difference:
in smoothing circuits
e.g. gravitational
blocking d.c.force (always) towards sphere B1
electric
(c) (i) in force direction depends
theoscillators
momentum/speed on sign of
is becoming charge on sphere / towards or
less M1
awayany from
so the sphere
sensible
radiussuggestions, one each, max. 2
is becoming smaller B1
B2
A1 [2]
[2]
e.g. gravitational field/force is attractive (B1)
electric
(ii) 1. field/force
spirals are is in
attractive
oppositeordirections
repulsive (B1)
M1
(allow anysosensible comparison)
(b) (i) potential across each capacitor is the same and Q = CV
oppositely charged B1
A1 [3]
[1]
[2]
2. equal
(ii) total chargeinitial
Q = radii
Q 1 + Q2 + Q3 M1
M1
(c) gravitational
CV =so force
V + C=
C1equal 1.67 ×V10–27 × 9.81
(initial)
2V + C3speeds A1
M1 [2]
–26
(allow Q = CV=here1.6 ×or10
–19
N
in (i)) –2
A1
electric
so Cforce
= C1=+1.6
C2 ×+ 10
C3–15 × 270 / (1.8 × 10 ) C1
A0 [2]
= 2.4 × 10 N A1
electric force very much greater than gravitational force B1 [4]
(c) (i)
10
4 (a) force on proton is normal to velocity and field M1
provides centripetal force (for circular motion) A1 [2]
(b) magnetic force = Bqv B1

A1 [1]
centripetal force = mrω2 or mv2/r B1
v = rω
(ii) B1
Bqv = Bqrω = mrω2
ω = Bq/m A1 [4]
5 (a) either φ = BA sinθ M1

A1 [1]
where A is the area (through which flux passes)
θ is the angle between B and (plane of) A A1
115 (a) or
(i) region (of space)
either where
φ = BA © University
a movingofcharge
Cambridge International
(may) experience Examinations
a force 2011 (M1)
where around
or A is area a magnet
normal to B where another magnet experiences a force B1
(A1) [1]
[2]
(ii) (Φ =) BA sinθ A1 [1]

(b) graph: VH constant and non zero between the poles and zero outside M1
sharp increase/decrease at ends of magnet A1 [2]
(b) (i) plane of frame is always parallel to BV / flux linkage always zero B1 [1]
(ii) ∆Φ = 1.8 × 10–5 × 52 × 10–2 × 95 × 10–2 C1

= 8.9 × 10–6 Wb A1 [2]
(c) (i) (induced) e.m.f. proportional to rate of M1

change of (magnetic) flux (linkage)
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012 A1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE
(ii) e.m.f. = (8.9 × 10–6) / 0.30 PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
–5
= 3.0 × 10 V A1 [1]
(iii) This question part was removed from the assessment. All candidates were
Page 4 PA GE 213
Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Page 3 GCE A LEVEL Mark – October/November
Scheme 2013 9702
Syllabus 43
Paper
126 (a) either constant speed parallel to plate
e.g.accelerated
(c) or motionleakage
some microwave / force normal to cooker
from the plate / in direction field B1
so notcontainer
e.g. circular for the water is also heated A0 [1]
(b) (i) direction of force due to magnetic field opposite to that due to electric field B1
4 (a) (i) magnetic
FE R Q1Qfield into2 plane of page
2 / 4πε0r
B1
C1 [2]
= = = = R 8.99 × 109 × (1.6 × 10–19)2 / (2.0 × 10–15)2
(ii) force R due
58 Nto magnetic field = force due to electric field B1
A1 [2]
Bqv = qE
(ii) BFG=REGm/ v m / r2
1 24
C1
C1
= = = =R(2.8
6.67×× 1010) –11
/ (4.7
× × 105×) 10–27)2 / (2.0 × 10–15)2
(1.67
–2
= = = =R6.0
4.7× ×1010–35TN A1
A1 [3]
[2]
(b) (i) force of repulsion (much) greater than force of attraction B1

(c) (i) no change
must / not deviated
be some other force of attraction B1
M1 [1]
to hold nucleus together A1 [3]
(ii) deviated upwards B1 [1]
(Do not allow if FG > FE in (a) or one of the forces not calculated in (a))
(iii) no change / not deviated B1 [1]
(ii) outside nucleus there is repulsion between protons B1
either attractive force must act only in nucleus
7 (a) (i) minimum
or if notphoton energyall nuclei would stick together
short range, B1
B1 [2]
minimum energy to remove an electron (from the surface) B1 [2]
135 (a) (ii) curve maximum

onlyeither KE is photon
with decreasing gradientenergy – work function energy M1
or max KE when electron
acceptable value near xR 0 and does ejected from the
not reach surface
zero B1
A1 [2]
energies lower than max because energy required to bring electron to
the surface
(if graph line less than 4.0 cm do not allow A1 mark) B1 [2]
(no credit if graph line has positive and negative values of VH)
(b) (i) threshold frequency = 1.0 × 1015 Hz (allow ±0.05 × 1015) C1
(b) graph: work function
from energy
0 to 2T, = hf0of a sinusoidal wave
two cycles C1
M1
all peaks above 3.5 mV = 6.63 × 10–34 × 1.0 × 1015 C1
–19
peaks at 4.95 / 5.0 mV (allow = 4.8
6.63mV× 10
to 5.2J mV) A1
A1 [3]
[3]
(allow alternative approaches based on use of co-ordinates of points on
the line)
(c) e.m.f. induced in coil when magnetic field / flux is changing / cutting B1
(ii) sketch: straight line with same gradient M1
either at each displaced to right
position, magnetic field does not vary A1 [2]
so no e.m.f. is induced in the coil / no reading on the millivoltmeter
(iii)
or intensity
at each determines number
position, switch of photons
off current and arriving per unit time
take millivoltmeter reading B1
intensity determines number of electrons per
or at each position, rapidly remove coil from field and unit time (notmeter
take energy)
reading B1
B1 [2]
[2]
86 (a)
(a) probability
electric andofmagnetic
decay (of a normal
fields nucleus)to/each
fraction of number of nuclei in sample
other B1
that decay M1
per unit time
either charged particle enters region normal to both fields A1 [2]
(allow λ =(dNB/ dt)
or correct / N with
direction symbols
w.r.t. explained
E for zero – (M1), (A1) )
deflection B1
for no deflection, v R E / B B1 [3]
(b) (i)
(no number = (1.2 × 6.02
credit if magnetic 1023) /clearly
field×region 235 not overlapping with electric field region) C1
21
= 3.1 × 10 A1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE © Cambridge International Examinations 2013 PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

5 (a) energy
(b) (magnitude of electric
lost (as thermal field strength
energy) is the potential gradient
in resistance/wires/battery/resistor B1
B1 [1]
useonly
(award of gradient
if answeratinx (a)(i)
= 4.0 >cm PA GE
answer in 214
(a)(ii)2) M1
gradient = 4.5 × 10 N C (allow ± 0.3 × 10 4 )
4 –1
A1
14
7 (a) graph:
or VH increases from zero when current switched on B1
VH then non-zero constant B1
VH returns
Q to zero when
Q current switchedVoff B1 [3]
V = and E = leading to E = (B1)
4πε0 x 4πε0 x 2 x
(b) (i) (induced) e.m.f.
3 proportional to rate M1
of = 1.8 × of
E change 10(magnetic)
/ 0.04 flux (linkage) (M1) [2]
A1
= 4.5 × 104 N C–1 (A1) [3]
(ii) pulse as current is being switched on B1
zero e.m.f.
3
when current in coil B1
(b) (i) pulse
3.6 × 10 V
in opposite direction when switching off A1
B1 [1]
[3]
(ii) capacitance = Q / V C1
–9
8 (a) discrete and equal=amounts
(8.0 × 10(of (3.6 × 103 )
) /charge) B1 [1]
–12
allow: discrete amounts 1.6 ×F10–19C/elementary charge/e
= 2.2 ×of10 A1 [2]
integral multiples of 1.6 × 10–19C/elementary charge/e
15
6 (a) (i) gravitational B1 [1]
(b) weight = qV / d
(ii) 10–14 = (q × and
4.8 ×gravitational × 10–3)
electric
680)/(7.0 B1
C1 [1]
–19
q = 4.9 × 10 C A1 [2]
(iii) magnetic and one other field given B1
magnetic, graviational and electric B1 [2]
–19 –19 –19
(c) elementary charge = 1.6
Cambridge × 10 C (allow
International AS / A 1.6 × 10
Level – May C to 1.7 ×2015
/ June 10 C ) 9702 M0 41
it isofa (plane
(b)or (i) out commonof)©factor
paper/page (not “upwards”) C1B1 [1]
Cambridge International Examinations 2015
it is the highest common factor A1 [2]
(ii) B = mv / qr C1
= (3.32 × 10–26 × 7.6 × 104 ) / (1.6 × 10–19 × 6.1 × 10–2) C1
9 (a) e.g. no time delay
= 0.26 T between illumination and emission A1 [3]
rate ofsemicircle
(c) sketch: emission with
of electrons
diameterdependent
< 12.2 cm on/proportional to intensity B1 [1]
(any three separate statements, one mark each, maximum 3) B3 [3]
7 (a) can change (output) voltage efficiently or to suit different consumers/appliances B1

Page
(b) 6(i) by(photon) Mark Scheme
interaction with electron
using transformers may be below surface Syllabus Paper
B1B1 [2]
Cambridge International AS / A Level
energy required to bring electron to surface – May / June 2015 9702 B141 [2]
16
13 (a)(b)(i)fortosame
alignpower,
nuclei/protons B1B1
current is smaller
to cause Larmor/precessional frequency to be in r.f. region B1 [2]
less heating in cables/wires
(ii)or Larmor/precessional frequency depends on (applied magnetic) field strength
thinner cables possible B1
knowing field strength enables (region of precessing) nuclei to be located
or less voltage loss in cables M1
B1 [2]
by knowing the frequency A1 [3]
8 (a) (i) p = h / λ
(b) E = 2.82 × 10–26 × B –34 –12
= (6.63 × 10 6 ) / (6.50 × 10
–26 ) C1
6.63 × 10–34 × 42 × 10
–22 = 2.82 × 10 ×B C1
= 1.02 × 10 N s A1 [2]
B = 0.99 T A1 [2]
(ii) E = hc / λ or E = pc
= (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.00 × 108 ) / (6.50 × 10–12) C1
= 3.06 × 10–14
© Cambridge
J International Examinations 2014 A1 [2]
(b) (i) 0.34 × 10–12 = (6.63 × 10–34 ) / (9.11 × 10–31 × 3.0 × 108 ) × (1 – cos θ) C1
CEDAR COLLEGE θ = 30.7° PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
A1 [2]
(ii) deflected electron has energy M1

this energy is derived from the incident photon A1
8 (a) op-amp has infinite/(very) large gain B1
(c) momentum is a vector quantity B1
op-ampmust
either saturates if V +momentum
consider ≠ V– in two directions M1
or direction changes so cannotPA GE 215
just consider magnitude B1 [2]
+ –
V is at earth potential so P (or V ) must be at earth A1 [3]
17
7 (a) moving magnet gives rise to/causes/induces e.m.f./current in solenoid/coil B1
(b) (induced current)tocreates
input resistance op-ampfield/flux in solenoid that opposes (motion of) magnet
is very large B1
work
or is done/energy is needed to move magnet (into solenoid) B1
(induced) current gives heating
current in R2 = current in R1 effect (in resistor) which comes from the work done B1
B1 [4]
VIN (– 0) = IR2 and (0) – VOUT = IR1 M1

(b) current in primary coil give rise to (magnetic) flux/field B1
(magnetic)
VOUT / VIN =flux
–R/ field (in core) is in phase with current (in primary coil) B1
1 / R2 A1 [3]
(magnetic) flux threads/links/cuts secondary coil inducing e.m.f. in secondary coil B1
(there must be a mention of secondary coil)
e.m.f. induced
(c) relay coil proportional
connected betweento rate
V of change/cutting
and earth of flux/field so not in phase B1
M1 [4]
OUT
correct diode symbol connected between VOUT and coil or between coil and earth M1
8 (a) (i) energy = 5.75 × 1.6 × 10–13
= 9.2
correct polarity 10–13(‘clockwise’)
for ×diode J A1
A1 [1]
[3]
(ii) number = 1900 / (9.2 × 10–13 × 0.24) C1
189 (a) 0.10 mm = 8.6 × 1015 s–1 A1
B1 [2]
[1]
(b) (i) decay constant = 0.693 /28(2.8 × 365 × 24 3600)× 10–19)

× 10–3 ×× 1.60 C1
(b) V H = (0.13 × 3.8) / (6.0 × 10 × 0.10 C1
= 7.85 × 10–9 s–1 (allow 7.8 or 7.9 to 2 s.f.) A1 [2]
= 5.1 × 10–7 V A1 [2]
(ii) A = λN
8.6 × 1015 = 7.85 × 10–9 × N C1
× 1024
N = 1.096 magnetic C1
10 (a) (non-uniform) flux in core is changing M1
Page 6 mass Mark Scheme
× 1024 × 236) / (6.02 × 1023)
= (1.096 e.m.f. Syllabus Paper
M1
induces (different)
Cambridge in (different
International parts
AS/A of) the
Level core
– May/June 2016 9702 A1
= 430 g A142 [4]
199 (a) (eddy) currents
(i) number form of
density in charge
the corecarriers/free electrons M1
(c) 0.84 or
= give
1.9 exp(–7.85 × 10–9 t) C1
whichnumber rise
8pertounit
heating
volume of charge carriers/free electrons A1
B1 [4]
[1]
t = 1.04 × 10 s
= 3.3 years A1 [2]
(ii) PX or QY or RZ B1 [1]
(b) (i) VH is inversely proportional to n

B1
for semiconductors, n is (much) smaller than for metals B1 [2]
(ii) magnetic field would deflect holes and electrons in same direction B1
(because) electrons are (–)ve, holes are (+)ve M1
so VH has opposite polarity/opposite sign A1 [3]
10 (a) iron rod changes flux (density)/field B1
change of flux in coil Q causes induced e.m.f. B1 [2]
(b) constant reading (either polarity) from time zero to near t1 B1
spike in one direction near t1 clearly showing a larger voltage M1
CEDAR COLLEGE
of opposite polarity PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
A1
zero reading from near t1 to t2 B1 [4]

PA GE 216
PARTICLE & NUCLEAR

PHYSICS 

PA GE 217

16
9 (a) A sample of a radioactive isotope contains N nuclei at time t. At time (t + Δt), it contains For
(N – ΔN) nuclei of the isotope. Examiner’s
Use
For the period Δt, state, in terms of N, ΔN and Δt,
(i) the mean activity of the sample,
activity = ............................................... [1]
(ii) the probability of decay of a nucleus.
probability = ............................................... [1]
(b) A cobalt-60 source having a half-life of 5.27 years is calibrated and found to have an
activity of 3.50 × 105 Bq. The uncertainty in the calibration is ±2%.
Calculate the length of time, in days, after the calibration has been made, for the stated
activity of 3.50 × 105 Bq to have a maximum possible error of 10%.
time = ...................................... days [4]

© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09
PA GE 218

16
8 The controlled reaction between deuterium ( 21 H) and tritium ( 31 H) has involved ongoing For
research for many years. The reaction may be summarised as Examiner’s
Use
2H + 3H 4He + 1n + Q
1 1 2 0
where Q = 17.7 MeV.
Binding energies per nucleon are shown in Fig. 8.1.
binding energy per nucleon

/ MeV
2H 1.12
1
1n –
0
4He 7.07
2
Fig. 8.1
(a) Suggest why binding energy per nucleon for the neutron is not quoted.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the mass defect, in kg, of a helium 42He nucleus.
mass defect = .......................................... kg [3]
(c) (i) State the name of the type of reaction illustrated by this nuclear equation.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Determine the binding energy per nucleon, in MeV, of tritium ( 31 H).
binding energy per nucleon = ....................................... MeV [3]

© UCLES 2009 9702/41/O/N/09
PA GE 219

16
8 The controlled reaction between deuterium ( 21 H) and tritium ( 31 H) has involved ongoing For
research for many years. The reaction may be summarised as Examiner’s
Use
2H + 3H 4He + 1n + Q
1 1 2 0
where Q = 17.7 MeV.
Binding energies per nucleon are shown in Fig. 8.1.
binding energy per nucleon

/ MeV
2H 1.12
1
1n –
0
4He 7.07
2
Fig. 8.1
(a) Suggest why binding energy per nucleon for the neutron is not quoted.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the mass defect, in kg, of a helium 42He nucleus.
mass defect = .......................................... kg [3]
(c) (i) State the name of the type of reaction illustrated by this nuclear equation.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Determine the binding energy per nucleon, in MeV, of tritium ( 31 H).

© UCLES 2009 9702/41/O/N/09
PA GE 220

18
8 (a) State what is meant by the decay constant of a radioactive isotope. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Show that the decay constant ! is related to the half-life t 1 by the expression
2
!t 1 = 0.693.
2
[3]
(c) Cobalt-60 is a radioactive isotope with a half-life of 5.26 years (1.66 × 108 s).
A cobalt-60 source for use in a school laboratory has an activity of 1.8 × 105 Bq.
Calculate the mass of cobalt-60 in the source.
mass = ............................................. g [3]

© UCLES 2009 9702/42/O/N/09
PA GE 221
4 (a) Explain what is meant by the potential energy of a body. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
2
(b) Two deuterium ( 1 H) nuclei each have initial kinetic energy EK and are initially separated
by a large distance.
The nuclei may be considered to be spheres of diameter 3.8 × 10–15 m with their masses
and charges concentrated at their centres.
The nuclei move from their initial positions to their final position of just touching, as
illustrated in Fig. 4.1.
2 2
initially 1H 1H
kinetic energy EK kinetic energy EK
3.8 × 10–15 m
2 2
finally 1H 1H
at rest
Fig. 4.1
(i) For the two nuclei approaching each other, calculate the total change in
1. gravitational potential energy,
energy = ............................................ J [3]
2. electric potential energy.
energy = ............................................ J [3]

© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10
PA GE 222
(ii) Use your answers in (i) to show that the initial kinetic energy EK of each nucleus For
is 0.19 MeV. Examiner’s
Use
[2]
(iii) The two nuclei may rebound from each other. Suggest one other effect that could
happen to the two nuclei if the initial kinetic energy of each nucleus is greater than
that calculated in (ii).
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

PA GE 223
8 A π0 meson is a sub-atomic particle. For

A stationary π0 meson, which has mass 2.4 × 10–28 kg, decays to form two γ-ray photons. Examiner’s
The nuclear equation for this decay is Use
π0 γ + γ.
(a) Explain why the two γ-ray photons have the same energy.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Determine, for each γ-ray photon,
(i) the energy, in joule,
energy = .............................................. J [2]
(ii) the wavelength,
wavelength = ............................................ m [2]

© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10
PA GE 224
15
(iii) the momentum. For

Examiner’s
Use
momentum = ........................................... N s [2]

PA GE 225
8 Americium-241 is an artificially produced radioactive element that emits α-particles. For

A sample of americium-241 of mass 5.1 μg is found to have an activity of 5.9 × 105 Bq. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Determine, for this sample of americium-241,
(i) the number of nuclei,
number = ............................................... [2]
(ii) the decay constant,
decay constant = ........................................ s–1 [2]
(iii) the half-life, in years.
half-life = .................................... years [2]
(b) Another radioactive element has a half-life of approximately 4 hours.

Suggest why measurement of the mass and activity of a sample of this element is not
appropriate for the determination of its half-life.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

PA GE 226
8 In some power stations, nuclear fission is used as a source of energy. For

Examiner’s
(a) State what is meant by nuclear fission. Use
.........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The nuclear fission reaction produces neutrons. In the power station, the neutrons may
be absorbed by rods made of boron-10.
Complete the nuclear equation for the absorption of a single neutron by a boron-10
nucleus with the emission of an a-particle.
10 .......
5B + ...................... 3Li + ...................... [3]
(c) Suggest why, when neutrons are absorbed in the boron rods, the rods become hot as a
result of this nuclear reaction.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

PA GE 227
2 (a) State the basic assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Use equations for the pressure of an ideal gas to deduce that the average translational
kinetic energy <EK> of a molecule of an ideal gas is given by the expression
<EK> = 3 RT
2 NA
where R is the molar gas constant, NA is the Avogadro constant and T is the
thermodynamic temperature of the gas.
[3]
2
(c) A deuterium nucleus 1H and a proton collide. A nuclear reaction occurs, represented by
the equation
2 1 3
1H + 1p 2 He + c.
(i) State and explain whether the reaction represents nuclear fission or nuclear
fusion.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 9702/43/O/N/10
PA GE 228
7
(ii) For the reaction to occur, the minimum total kinetic energy of the deuterium nucleus For
and the proton is 2.4 × 10–14 J. Examiner’s
Assuming that a sample of a mixture of deuterium nuclei and protons behaves as Use
an ideal gas, calculate the temperature of the sample for this reaction to occur.
temperature = ............................................. K [3]
(iii) Suggest why the assumption made in (ii) may not be valid.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

PA GE 229
8 (a) The variation with nucleon number A of the binding energy per nucleon BE of nuclei is For
Use
BE
0
A
Fig. 8.1
On Fig. 8.1, mark the approximate positions of
(i) iron-56 (label this point Fe), [1]
(ii) zirconium-97 (label this point Zr), [1]
(iii) hydrogen-2 (label this point H). [1]
(b) (i) State what is meant by nuclear fission.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) By reference to Fig. 8.1, explain how fission is energetically possible.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11 PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
PA GE 230
8 (a) State what is meant by the binding energy of a nucleus. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Show that the energy equivalence of 1.0 u is 930 MeV.
[3]
(c) Data for the masses of some particles and nuclei are given in Fig. 8.1.
mass / u
proton 1.0073
neutron 1.0087
deuterium ( 21H) 2.0141
zirconium ( 97
40Zr) 97.0980
Fig. 8.1
Use data from Fig. 8.1 and information from (b) to determine, in MeV,
(i) the binding energy of deuterium,
binding energy = ....................................... MeV [2]

© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11
PA GE 231
19
(ii) the binding energy per nucleon of zirconium. For

Examiner’s
Use

PA GE 232
12 Oct/nov 2011 , Question #8 , qp_41 17
8 The isotope phosphorus-33 ( 33 33

15 P) undergoes β-decay to form sulfur-33 ( 16 S), which is For
stable. Examiner’s
Use
The half-life of phosphorus-33 is 24.8 days.
(a) (i) Define radioactive half-life.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Show that the decay constant of phosphorus-33 is 3.23 × 10–7 s–1.
[1]
(b) A pure sample of phosphorus-33 has an initial activity of 3.7 × 106 Bq.
Calculate
(i) the initial number of phosphorus-33 nuclei in the sample,
number = .................................................. [2]
(ii) the number of phosphorus-33 nuclei remaining in the sample after 30 days.
number = .................................................. [2]

PA GE 233
18
(c) After 30 days, the sample in (b) will contain phosphorus-33 and sulfur-33 nuclei. For
Use your answers in (b) to calculate the ratio Examiner’s
Use
number of phosphorus-33 nuclei after 30 days .
number of sulfur-33 nuclei after 30 days
ratio = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/O/N/11

PA GE 234
8 Radon-222 is a radioactive element having a half-life of 3.82 days. For

Examiner’s
Radon-222, when found in atmospheric air, can present a health hazard. Safety measures Use
should be taken when the activity of radon-222 exceeds 200 Bq per cubic metre of air.
(a) (i) Define radioactive decay constant.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Show that the decay constant of radon-222 is 2.1 × 10–6 s–1.
[1]
(b) A volume of 1.0 m3 of atmospheric air contains 2.5 × 1025 molecules.
Calculate the ratio
number of air molecules in 1.0 m3 of atmospheric air

number of radon-222 atoms in 1.0 m3 of atmospheric air
for the minimum activity of radon-222 at which safety measures should be taken.
ratio = ................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2011 9702/43/O/N/11
PA GE 235

17
9 (a) (i) State what is meant by the decay constant of a radioactive isotope. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Show that the decay constant λ and the half-life t !" of an isotope are related by the
expression
λt !" = 0.693.
[3]
(b) In order to determine the half-life of a sample of a radioactive isotope, a student

measures the count rate near to the sample, as illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
to
counter
detector
shielding
sample of
radioactive
material
Fig. 9.1

PA GE 236
18
Initially, the measured count rate is 538 per minute. After a time of 8.0 hours, the For
measured count rate is 228 per minute. Examiner’s
Use
Use these data to estimate the half-life of the isotope.
half-life = ...................................... hours [3]
(c) The accepted value of the half-life of the isotope in (b) is 5.8 hours.
The difference between this value for the half-life and that calculated in (b) cannot be
explained by reference to faulty equipment.
Suggest two possible reasons for this difference.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

PA GE 237

17
8 The element strontium has at least 16 isotopes. One of these isotopes is strontium-89. This For
isotope has a half-life of 52 days. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State what is meant by isotopes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the probability per second of decay of a nucleus of strontium-89.
probability = ............................................ s–1 [3]
(c) A laboratory prepares a strontium-89 source.

The activity of this source is measured 21 days after preparation of the source and is
found to be 7.4 × 106 Bq.
Determine, for the strontium-89 source at the time that it was prepared,
(i) the activity,
activity = ............................................ Bq [2]
(ii) the mass of strontium-89.
mass = ............................................... g [2]

PA GE 238

15
8 When a neutron is captured by a uranium-235 nucleus, the outcome may be represented by For
the nuclear equation shown below. Examiner’s
Use
235
92 U + 10 n 95
42 Mo + 139 1 0
57 La + x 0 n + 7–1 e
(a) (i) Use the equation to determine the value of x.
x = ................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of the particle represented by the symbol –10 e.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Some data for the nuclei in the reaction are given in Fig. 8.1.
mass / u binding energy per nucleon

/ MeV
uranium-235 ( 235
92 U) 235.123
molybdenum-95 ( 95
42 Mo) 94.945 8.09
lanthanum-139 ( 139
57 La) 138.955 7.92
proton ( 11 p) 1.007
neutron ( 10 n) 1.009
Fig. 8.1
Use data from Fig. 8.1 to
(i) determine the binding energy, in u, of a nucleus of uranium-235,
binding energy = ............................................. u [3]

PA GE 239
16
(ii) show that the binding energy per nucleon of a nucleus of uranium-235 is 7.18 MeV. For
Examiner’s
Use
[3]
(c) The kinetic energy of the neutron before the reaction is negligible.
Use data from (b) to calculate the total energy, in MeV, released in this reaction.
energy = ........................................ MeV [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/O/N/12

PA GE 24 0
8 (a) State what is meant by a nuclear fusion reaction. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) One nuclear reaction that takes place in the core of the Sun is represented by the
equation
2 1 3
1H + 1H 2 He + energy.
Data for the nuclei are given in Fig. 8.1.
mass / u
proton 11 H 1.00728
2
deuterium 1H 2.01410
helium 32 He 3.01605
Fig. 8.1
(i) Calculate the energy, in joules, released in this reaction.
energy = .............................................. J [3]
(ii) The temperature in the core of the Sun is approximately 1.6 × 107 K.
Suggest why such a high temperature is necessary for this reaction to take place.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13
PA GE 241

16
8 (a) Explain why the mass of an α-particle is less than the total mass of two individual For
protons and two individual neutrons. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An equation for one possible nuclear reaction is
4He + 14N 17O + 1p.

2 7 8 1
Data for the masses of the nuclei are given in Fig. 8.1.
mass / u
proton 1p 1.00728
1
helium-4 4He 4.00260
2
nitrogen-14 14N 14.00307
7
oxygen-17 17O 16.99913
8
Fig. 8.1
(i) Calculate the mass change, in u, associated with this reaction.
mass change = .............................................. u [2]
(ii) Calculate the energy, in J, associated with the mass change in (i).
energy = ............................................... J [2]

© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13
PA GE 242
17
(iii) Suggest and explain why, for this reaction to occur, the helium-4 nucleus must have For
a minimum speed. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

PA GE 243

16
8 (a) State what is meant by nuclear binding energy. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The variation with nucleon number A of the binding energy per nucleon BE is shown in
Fig. 8.1.
BE
0
0
A
Fig. 8.1
When uranium-235 ( 235

92U) absorbs a slow-moving neutron, one possible nuclear
reaction is
235U + 1n 95Mo + 139La + 2 10n + 7–10β + energy.

92 0 42 57
(i) State the name of this type of nuclear reaction.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, mark the position of
1. the uranium-235 nucleus (label this position U), [1]
2. the molybdenum-95 ( 95
42Mo) nucleus (label this position Mo), [1]
3. the lanthanum-139 ( 139

57La) nucleus (label this position La). [1]

© UCLES 2013 9702/41/O/N/13
PA GE 24 4
17
(iii) The masses of some particles and nuclei are given in Fig. 8.2. For
Examiner’s
Use
mass / u
β-particle 5.5 × 10–4
neutron 1.009
proton 1.007
uranium-235 235.123
molybdenum-95 94.945
lanthanum-139 138.955
Fig. 8.2
Calculate, for this reaction,
1. the change, in u, of the rest mass,
change in mass = .............................................. u [2]
2. the energy released, in MeV, to three significant figures.
energy = ......................................... MeV [3]

PA GE 245

18
9 For a particular metal surface, it is observed that there is a minimum frequency of light below
which photoelectric emission does not occur. This observation provides evidence for a particulate
nature of electromagnetic radiation.
(a) State three further observations from photoelectric emission that provide evidence for a
particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Some data for the variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic energy EMAX of electrons
emitted from a metal surface are shown in Fig. 9.1.
0.6
0.5
E MAX
/ eV
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5
f / 1014 Hz
Fig. 9.1
(i) Explain why emitted electrons may have kinetic energy less than the maximum at any
particular frequency.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

PA GE 246
19
(ii) Use Fig. 9.1 to determine
1. the threshold frequency,
threshold frequency = ................................................... Hz [1]
2. the work function energy, in eV, of the metal surface.
work function energy = ................................................... eV [3]

PA GE 247

20
10 (a) Explain what is meant by the binding energy of a nucleus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Data for the masses of some particles are given in Fig. 10.1.
mass / u
proton 1.00728
neutron 1.00867
tritium ( 31H) nucleus 3.01551
polonium ( 210 209.93722
84Po) nucleus
Fig. 10.1
The energy equivalent of 1.0 u is 930 MeV.
(i) Calculate the binding energy, in MeV, of a tritium ( 31H) nucleus.
binding energy = ................................................ MeV [3]
(ii) The total mass of the separate nucleons that make up a polonium-210 ( 210
84Po) nucleus is
211.70394 u.
Calculate the binding energy per nucleon of polonium-210.
binding energy per nucleon = ................................................ MeV [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

PA GE 248
21
(c) One possible fission reaction is
235U + 1n 141Ba + 92Kr + 3 10n .

92 0 56 36
By reference to binding energy, explain, without any calculation, why this fission reaction is
energetically possible.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

PA GE 249
9 Some water becomes contaminated with radioactive iodine-131 ( 131 53I).

The activity of the iodine-131 in 1.0 kg of this water is 460 Bq.
The half-life of iodine-131 is 8.1 days.
(a) Define radioactive half-life.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) Calculate the number of iodine-131 atoms in 1.0 kg of this water.
number = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) An amount of 1.0 mol of water has a mass of 18 g.
Calculate the ratio
number of molecules of water in 1.0 kg of water

.
number of atoms of iodine-131 in 1.0 kg of contaminated water
ratio = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

PA GE 25 0
17
(c) An acceptable limit for the activity of iodine-131 in water has been set as 170 Bq kg −1.
Calculate the time, in days, for the activity of the contaminated water to be reduced to this
acceptable level.
time = ................................................ days [3]

PA GE 251
9 One likely means by which nuclear fusion may be achieved on a practical scale is the D-T reaction.
(a) State what is meant by nuclear fusion.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) In the D-T reaction, a deuterium ( 21H) nucleus fuses with a tritium ( 31H) nucleus to form a
helium-4 ( 42He) nucleus. The nuclear equation for the reaction is
2H + 3H 4He + 1n + energy
1 1 2 0
Some data for this reaction are given in Fig. 9.1.
mass / u
deuterium ( 21H) 2.01356

tritium ( 31H) 3.01551
helium-4 ( 42He) 4.00151
neutron ( 10n) 1.00867
Fig. 9.1
(i) Calculate the energy, in MeV, equivalent to 1.00 u. Explain your working.
energy = ................................................ MeV [3]
(ii) Use data from Fig. 9.1 and your answer in (i) to determine the energy released in this
D-T reaction.
energy = ................................................ MeV [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/O/N/14

PA GE 252
21
(iii) Suggest why, for the D-T reaction to take place, the temperature of the deuterium and
the tritium must be high.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

PA GE 253
9 During the de-commissioning of a nuclear reactor, a mass of 2.5 × 106 kg of steel is found to be
contaminated with radioactive nickel-63 ( 63 28 Ni).
The total activity of the steel due to the nickel-63 contamination is 1.7 × 1014 Bq.
(a) Calculate the activity per unit mass of the steel.
activity per unit mass = ........................................... Bq kg−1 [1]
(b) Special storage precautions need to be taken when the activity per unit mass due to
contamination exceeds 400 Bq kg−1.
Nickel-63 is a β-emitter with a half-life of 92 years.
The maximum energy of an emitted β-particle is 0.067 MeV.
(i) Use your answer in (a) to calculate the energy, in J, released per second in a mass of
1.0 kg of steel due to the radioactive decay of the nickel.
energy = ..................................................... J [1]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to suggest, with a reason, whether the steel will be at a high
temperature.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/O/N/14

PA GE 254
21
(iii) Use your answer in (a) to determine the time interval before special storage precautions
for the steel are not required.
time = .............................................. years [3]

PA GE 255
9 (a) An isotope of an element is radioactive. Explain what is meant by radioactive decay.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) At time t, a sample of a radioactive isotope contains N nuclei. In a short time Δt, the number of
nuclei that decay is ΔN.
State expressions, in terms of the symbols t, Δt, N and ΔN for
(i) the number of undecayed nuclei at time (t + Δt),
number = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) the mean activity of the sample during the time interval Δt,
mean activity = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) the probability of decay of a nucleus during the time interval Δt,
probability = ......................................................... [1]
(iv) the decay constant.
decay constant = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

PA GE 256
19
(c) The variation with time t of the activity A of a sample of a radioactive isotope is shown in
Fig. 9.1.
0
0 t½ 2t ½ 3t ½
t
Fig. 9.1
The radioactive isotope decays to form a stable isotope S. At time t = 0, there are no nuclei of
S in the sample.
On the axes of Fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the number n of
nuclei of S in the sample.
0
0 t½ 2t ½ 3t ½
t
Fig. 9.2
[2]

PA GE 257

16
8 The power for a space probe is to be supplied by the energy released when plutonium-236 decays
by the emission of α-particles.
The α-particles, each of energy 5.75 MeV, are captured and their energy is converted into electrical
energy with an efficiency of 24%.
(a) Calculate
(i) the energy, in joules, equal to 5.75 MeV,
energy = ....................................................... J [1]
(ii) the number of α-particles per second required to generate 1.9 kW of electrical power.
number per second = .................................................... s–1 [2]
(b) Each plutonium-236 nucleus, on disintegration, produces one α-particle.

Plutonium-236 has a half-life of 2.8 years.
(i) Calculate the decay constant, in s–1, of plutonium-236.
decay constant = .................................................... s–1 [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

PA GE 258
17
(ii) Use your answers in (a)(ii) and (b)(i) to determine the mass of plutonium-236 required
for the generation of 1.9 kW of electrical power.
mass = ....................................................... g [4]
(c) The minimum electrical power required for the space probe is 0.84 kW.
Calculate the time, in years, for which the sample of plutonium-236 in (b)(ii) will provide
sufficient power.
time = ................................................ years [2]

PA GE 259
13 Copper-66 is a radioactive isotope.
When a nucleus of copper-66 decays, the emissions include a β− particle and a γ-ray photon.
The count rate produced from a sample of the isotope copper-66 is measured using a detector
and counter, as illustrated in Fig. 13.1.
to counter
detector
radioactive
sample
shielding
Fig. 13.1
(a) State three reasons why the activity of the sample of copper-66 is not equal to the measured
count rate.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

PA GE 26 0
28
(b) In a time of 42.0 minutes, the count rate from the sample of copper-66 is found to decrease
from 3.62 × 104 Bq to 1.21 × 102 Bq.
Calculate the half-life of copper-66.
half-life = .......................................... minutes [2]
(c) The γ-ray photons emitted from radioactive nuclei have specific energies, dependent on the
nucleus emitting the photons.
By comparison with emission line spectra, suggest what can be deduced about energy levels
in nuclei.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

PA GE 261
13 (a) Explain what is meant by gamma radiation (γ-radiation).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A source of gamma radiation is placed a fixed distance away from a detector and counter, as
illustrated in Fig. 13.1.
Fig. 13.1
A sheet of lead of thickness x is placed between the source and the detector.
The average count rate C, corrected for background, is recorded. This is repeated for different
values of x.
The variation with thickness x of ln C is shown in Fig. 13.2.
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

PA GE 262
27
4.00
3.75
ln ( / s–1)
3.50
3.25
3.00
2.75
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
/ mm
Fig. 13.2
The absorption of gamma radiation in lead may be represented by the equation
C = C0 e−μx
where C0 is the count rate for x = 0 and μ is the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient.
Use Fig. 13.2 to determine the linear attenuation coefficient μ for this gamma radiation in lead.
μ = .............................................. mm−1 [4]
Question 13 continues on the next page.

PA GE 263
28
(c) The value of μ calculated in (b) is for gamma radiation in lead.
Suggest and explain whether the value of μ for aluminium would be the same, greater or
smaller.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

(photon) energy = h × frequency B1 [3]
PA GE 264
Page 4 p is the momentum
where Mark Scheme:
(of the Teachers’ ANSWERS
particle) version
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009
Syllabus
9702
Paper
42
A1 [3]
916 (a)
(a) (i)
(i) ∆N
e.m.f.
/ ∆tinduced
(ignore proportional
any sign) / equal to ................................................................M1 B1 [1]
rate of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) ......................................................... A1 [2]
(ii) ∆N
(ii) / N (induced)
e.m.f. (ignore any sign)
only when flux is changing / cut ................................................ B1 B1 [1]
direct current gives constant flux ........................................................................ B1 [2]
(b) source must decay by 8% C1
t/T
A = A exp(–ln2
(b) (i) (induced)
0 t / T ) or A/ A = 1 /
e.m.f. / ½current acts in 0such a direction(2 ) to produce effects ................. B1 C1
0.92 to = oppose
exp(–ln2the×change
t / 5.27)causing
or 0.92 = 1 / (2t/5.27 )
it ......................................................................... B1 C1[2]
t = 0.634 years
(ii)= (induced)
230 dayscurrent in secondary produces magnetic field ....................................M1 A1 [4]
(allowopposes
2 marks(changing)
for A/ A0 field produced
= 0.08, answerin7010 primary days....................................................M1
allow so not infor
1 mark phase
A/ A0 ..................................................................................................
= 0.12, answer 5880 days) A0 [2]
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’

UCLESisversion Syllabus Paper
(c) (i) alternating
GCE means
A/ASthat voltage
LEVEL /©current 2009
easy to change
– October/November 2009 ................................
9702 B1
41 [1]
28 (a) (ii) highisvoltage

neutron means
a single less/ particle
nucleon power / energy loss (during transmission) .................. B1
......................................................................... B1 [1]
[1]
[Total: 10]
(b) binding energy = 4 × 7.07 × 1.6 × 10-13 .................................................................... C1
-12
7 = 4.52 to
(a) each line corresponds × 10 J
a (specific) photon energy ................................................. B1
2
binding energy when
photon emitted = c ∆m ...........................................................................................
electron changes its energy level ............................................ B1 C1
-12
discrete
4.52 × 10energy
= (3.0 × 108)so
changes 2
×discrete
∆m levels ............................................................... B1 [3]
∆m = 5.03 × 10-29 kg ................................................................................................ A1 [3]
(b) (i) E = hc / λ …(allow ratio ideas) ...................................................................... C1

(c) (i) fusion= (6.63 × 10-34not
……(do × 3.0 8
× 10fussion)
allow 10-9)
) / (486 ×.................................................................... B1 [1]
-19
= 4.09 × 10 J .............................................................................................. A1 [2]
(ii) (2 × 1.12) + 3x = 28.28 ................................................................................... C1
(ii) …...
four transitions to/from – 5.45 × 10-19 J level ....................................................... B1
–17.7 .......................................................................................................... C1
xall=transitions
2.78 MeVshown from higher
per nucleon to lower energy (level) .................................... B1
................................................................................ A1 [2]
[3]
(use of +17.7 gives x = 14.6 MeV, allow 1 mark only)
[Total: 7]
[Total: 8]
38 (a) (constant) probability of decay ..................................................................................M1
per unit time ............................................................................................................... A1 [2]
(reference to decay of isotope / mass / sample / nuclide, allow max 1 mark)
(b) either when time = t½, N = ½N0

or ½N0 = N exp(-λt½) t½ ..........................................................................M1
either 2 = exp(λt½)
or ½ = exp(-λt½) ..................................................................................M1
(taking logs), ln2 = 0.693 = λt½ ............................................................................ A1 [3]
(c) A = λN
1.8 × 105 = N × (0.693 / {1.66 × 108}) ..................................................................... C1
N = 4.3 × 1013
mass = 60 × (N / NA) or 60 × N × u ................................................................... C1
= (60 × 4.3 × 1011) / (6.02 × 1023)
= 4.3 × 10-9 g ................................................................................................. A1 [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
(ii) four transitions to/from – 5.45 × 10 J level ....................................................... B1
all transitions shown from higher to lower energy (level) .................................... B1 [2]
PA GE 265
[Total: 7]
84 (a) (constant) probability of decay ..................................................................................M1

per unit time ............................................................................................................... A1 [2]
(reference to decay of isotope / mass / sample / nuclide, allow max 1 mark)
(b) either when time = t½, N = ½N0

or ½N0 = N exp(-λt½) t½ ..........................................................................M1
either 2 = exp(λt½)
or ½ = exp(-λt½) ..................................................................................M1
(taking logs), ln2 = 0.693 = λt½ ............................................................................ A1 [3]
(c) A = λN
1.8 × 105 = N × (0.693 / {1.66 × 108}) ..................................................................... C1
N = 4.3 × 1013
mass = 60 × (N / NA) or 60 × N × u ................................................................... C1
= (60 × 4.3 × 1011) / (6.02 × 1023)
= 4.3 × 10-9 g ................................................................................................. A1 [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
45 (a) ability to do work B1

as a result of the position/shape, etc. of an object B1 [2]
(b) (i) 1 ∆Egpe = GMm / r C1

= (6.67 × 10–11 × {2 × 1.66 × 10–27}2) / (3.8 × 10–15) C1
= 1.93 × 10–49 J A1 [3]
2 ∆Eepe = Qq / 4πε0r C1
= (1.6 × 10–19)2 / (4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × 3.8 × 10–15) C1
= 6.06 × 10–14 J A1 [3]
(ii) idea that 2EK = ∆Eepe – ∆Egpe B1

EK = 3.03 × 10–14 J
= (3.03 × 10–14) / 1.6 × 10–13 M1
= 0.19 MeV A0 [2]
(iii) fusion may occur / may break into sub-nuclear particles B1 [1]
5 (a) (i) VH depends on angle between (plane of) probe and B-field B1
either VH max when plane and B-field are normal to each other
or VH zero when plane and B-field are parallel
or VH depends on sine of angle between plane and B-field B1 [2]
(ii) 1 calculates VHr at least three times M1

to 1 s.f. constant so valid or approx constant so valid
or to 2 s.f., not constant so invalid A1 [2]
2 straight line passes through origin B1 [1]
CEDAR COLLEGE
(b) (i) e.m.f. induced is proportional / equal to PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
M1
rate of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1
constant field in coil / flux (linkage) of coil does not change B1 [3]
zero force shown at θ = 0° M1
(ii) Bqv = mv 2 curve
reasonable /r with F about ½ max at 30° C1
A1 [3]
q/m = (1.3 × 107) / (7.9 × 10–2 × 930 × 10–6) C1
= 1.8 × 1011 C kg–1 PA GE 266 A1 [3]
(b) (i) force on electron due to magnetic field B1
force on electron normal to magnetic field and direction of electron B1 [2]
86 (a) momentum conservation hence momenta of photons are equal (but opposite) M1
(ii)
samequote / mention
momentum so of (Fleming’s)
same energy left hand rule M1
A1 [2]
electron moves towards QR A1 [2]
(b) (i) (∆)E = (∆)mc2 C1

7 (a) either the value
= 1.2 of –28
× 10 steady × 108)2 voltage
× (3.0/ constant M1
that produces –11
= 1.08 × 10 same J power (in a resistor) as the alternating voltage A1
A1 [2]
[2]
or if alternating voltage is squared and averaged (M1)
(ii) E the r.m.s.
= hc / λ value is the square root of this averaged value (A1)
λ = (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108) / (1.08 × 10–11) C1
= 1.84 × 10–14 m A1 [2]
(b) (i) 220 V A1 [1]
(iii) λ = h/p
(ii) 156 V A1 [1]
p = (6.63 × 10–34) / (1.84 × 10–14) C1
= 3.6 × 10–20 N s A1 [2]
(iii) 60 Hz A1 [1]
Section B
(c) power = Vrms2 / R C1
R = 1562 / 1500
9 (a) (i) point X shown correctly B1 [1]
= 16 Ω A1 [2]
(ii) op-amp has very large / infinite gain M1
non-inverting input is–6at earth (potential) / earthed / at 0 V M1
87 (a) (i) ifnumber
amplifier= is(5.1 to10
not × × 1023) / input
× 6.02inverting
saturate, 241 must be (almost) C1
16
= 1.27 ×
at earth potential 10(V)
/0 same potential as inverting input A1
A1 [2]
[3]
(ii) A = λN C1
(b) (i) total 105 resistance
5.9 ×input = λ × 1.27 × = 10
16
1.2 kΩ C1
λ = 4.65 ×
(amplifier) 10–11(=s–1–4.2 / 1.2) = –3.5
gain A1
C1 [2]
(voltmeter) reading = –3.5 × –1.5
(iii) 4.65 × 10–11 × t½ = ln2 = 5.25 V C1
A1 [3]
10
t½ =disregard
(total 1.49 × 10of s
signs or incorrect sign in answer, max 2 marks)
= 470 years A1 [2]
(ii) (less bright so) resistance of LDR increases M1
(amplifier) gain decreases M1
(b) sample / activityreading
(voltmeter) would decay appreciably whilst measurements are being made
decreases B1
A1 [1]
[3]
© UCLES 2010
© UCLES 2010

Page 2 λ = hc / E –34Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus C1
Paper
= (6.63 × GCE
10 A × 3.0 × 108–) October/November
LEVEL / (4.57 × 10–19) 2010 9702 43
= 4.4 × 10–7 m PA GE 267 A1 [2]
Section A
8
8
1 (a) splitting
(a) (i) rateof ofachange
heavy nucleus (not atom/nuclide)
of angle / angular displacement M1
M1
into two (lighter) nuclei
swept out by radius of approximately same mass A1
A1 [2]
[2]
1
(b) (ii)
0 n ω × T = 2π B1 [1]
4
2 He (allow 42 α ) M2
7
3 Li
(b) centripetal force is provided by the gravitational force A1
B1 [3]
either mr(2π/T)2 = GMm/r 2 or mrω 2 = GMm/r 2 M1
3 2 2
r × 4π = GM × T A1
(c) emitted2 particles have kinetic energy B1
GM/4π is a constant (c) A1
range of particles in the control rods is short / particles stopped in rods /
T 2 = cr 3 A0 [4]
lose kinetic energy in rods B1
kinetic energy of particles converted to thermal energy B1 [3]
2 3 2 2 3
(c) (i) either T = (45/1.08) × 0.615 or T = 0.30 × 45 C1
T = 165 years © UCLES 2010 A1 [2]
(ii) speed = (2π × 1.08 × 108) / (0.615 × 365 × 24 × 3600) C1

= 35 km s–1 A1 [2]
9
2 (a) atoms / molecules / particles behave as elastic (identical) spheres (1)
volume of atoms / molecules negligible compared to volume of containing vessel (1)
time of collision negligible to time between collisions (1)
no forces of attraction or repulsion between atoms / molecules (1)
atoms / molecules / particles are in (continuous) random motion (1)
(any four, 1 each) B4 [4]
(b) pV = 1
3
Nm<c2> and pV = nRT or pV = NkT B1
1 2 2
3
Nm<c > = nRT or = NkT and <EK> = ½m<c > B1
n = N/NA or k = R/NA B1
3
<EK> = × R/NA × T A0 [3]
2
(c) (i) reaction represents either build-up of nucleus from light nuclei
or build-up of heavy nucleus from nuclei M1
so fusion reaction A1 [2]
(ii) proton and deuterium nucleus will have equal kinetic energies B1
1.2 × 10–14 = 32 × 8.31 / (6.02 × 1023) × T C1
T = 5.8 × 108 K A1 [3]
(use of E = 2.4 × 10–14 giving 1.16 × 109 K scores 1 mark)
(iii) either inter-molecular / atomic / nuclear forces exist

or proton and deuterium nucleus are positively charged / repel B1 [1]
© UCLES 2010

7 wavelength
(a) (ii) of wave(per
fewer photons associated with a particle
unit time) M1
M1
that is
somoving PA GE 268
(maximum) current is smaller A1
A1 [2]
[2]
108 (a) (i) energy

(b) of electron
Fe shown near peak = 850 × 1.6 × 10–19 M1
A1 [1]
= 1.36 × 10–16 J
2
(ii) energy = pabout
Zr shown / 2mhalf-way
or p = mv alongand EK = ½mv 2
plateau A1 [1]
momentum = √ (1.36 × 10 × 2 × 9.11 × 10–31)
–16
M1
–23
= 1.6than
(iii) H shown at less × 10
0.4 ofN smaximum height A0
A1 [2]
[1]
(ii) λ = h / p C1
(b) (i) wavelength
heavy / large=nucleus 10–34) / up
(6.63 × breaks × 10–23)
(1.6/ splits M1
–11
= 4.1
into two nuclei × 10 mof approximately equal mass
/ fragments A1
A1 [2]
[2]
(ii) binding energy of nucleus = BE × A B1

(c) diagram or description
binding showing:
energy of parent nucleus is less than sum of binding energies
electron beam in
of fragments a vacuum B1
B1 [2]
incident on thin metal target / carbon film B1
fluorescent screen B1
pattern of concentric rings observed M1
pattern similar to diffraction pattern observed with visible light A1 [5]
11
8 (a) energy required to separate nucleons in a nucleus M1
to infinity A1 [2]
(b) 1u = 1.66 × 10–27 kg

E = mc2 C1
= 1.66 × 10–27 × (3.0 × 108)2 M1
= 1.49 × 10–10 J
= (1.49 × 10–10) / (1.6 × 10–13) M1
= 930 MeV A0 [3]
(c) (i) ∆m = 2.0141u – (1.0073 + 1.0087)u

= –1.9 × 10–3 u C1
binding energy = 1.9 × 10–3 × 930
=1.8 MeV A1 [2]
(ii) ∆m = (57 × 1.0087u) + (40 × 1.0073u) – 97.0980u C1
= (–)0.69 u
binding energy per nucleon = (0.69 × 930) / 97 C1
= 6.61 MeV A1 [3]

(c) spectrum appears as continuous
GCE AS/A spectrum crossed by2011
LEVEL – October/November dark lines 9702 B1
43
two dark lines B1
7 electrons
(a) (i) in gas absorb
packet/quantum photons with energies equal to the excitation energies
of energy M1
M1
PA GE 269
lightof
photons re-emitted in all directions
electromagnetic radiation A1 [4]
[2]
(ii) minimum energy to cause emission of an electron (from surface) B1 [1]

128 (a) (i) time for initial number of nuclei/activity M1
to reduce to one half of its initial value A1 [2]
(b) (i) hc/λ = Φ + Emax M1
= ln
(ii) cλ and 2/(24.8 × 24 × 3600)
h explained M1
A1 [2]
= 3.23 × 10–7 s–1 A0 [1]
(ii) 1. either when 1/λ = 0, Φ = –Emax
or evidence of use of x-axis intercept from graph
(b) (i) A = orλN chooses point close to the line and substitutes values of 1/λ and C1
3.76 × 106 E = max
3.23 10–7 =× Φ
into× hc/λ N + Emax C1
13
N =Φ1.15= 4.0 × 10–19 J (allow ±0.2 × 10–19 J)
× 10 A1
A1 [2]
[2]
(ii) 2. N0 e–λtgradient of graph is 1/hc

N =either C1
1013 × exp(–{ln
= 1.15 ×gradient = 4.80 2××10 24
→ 5.06 × 1024
30}/24.8) C1
M1
12 8
= 4.97 ×h10= 1/(gradient × 3.0 × 10 ) A1 [2]
–34 –34
= 6.6 × 10 J s → 6.9 × 10 J s A1
or chooses point close to the line and substitutes values of 1/λ and
(c) ratio = (4.97 × E 1012)/(1.15 × 1013 – 4.97 × 1012) C1
max into hc/λ = Φ + Emax (C1)
= 0.76 values of 1/λ and E are correct within half a square A1
(M1) [2]
max
h = 6.6 × 10–34 J s → 6.9 × 10–34 J s (A1) [3]
(Allow full credit for the correct use of any appropriate method)
(Do not allow ‘circular’ofcalculations
© University in part 2 that
Cambridge International lead to the
Examinations same value of
2011
Planck constant that was substituted in part 1)
13
8 (a) (i) probability of decay (of a nucleus) M1
(ii) λt½ = ln 2
λ = ln 2/(3.82 × 24 × 3600) M1
= 2.1 × 10–6 s–1 A0 [1]
(b) A = λN C1
200 = 2.1 × 10–6 × N C1
N = 9.5 × 107
ratio = (2.5 × 1025)/(9.5 × 107)
= 2.6 × 1017 A1 [3]

Page 5 PA GE 270 version
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ Syllabus Paper
149 (a) (i) either probability of decay (of a nucleus) M1

or λ = (–)(dN/dt) / N (M1)
(–)dN/dt and N explained (A1)
(ii) in time t½, number of nuclei changes from N0 to ½N0 B1

½ = exp(–λ t½) or 2 = exp (λ t½) B1
ln (½) = –λ t½ and ln (½) = –0.693 or ln 2 = λ t½ and ln 2 = 0.693 B1
0.693 = λ t½ A0 [3]
(b) 228 = 538 exp(–8λ) C1

λ = 0.107 (hours–1) C1
t½ = 6.5 hours (do not allow 3 or more SF) A1 [3]
(c) e.g. random nature of decay

background radiation
daughter product is radioactive

15
8 (a) nuclei having same number of protons/proton (atomic) number B1
different numbers of neutrons/neutron number B1 [2]
(allow second mark for nucleons/nucleon number/mass number/atomic
mass if made clear that same number of protons/proton number)
(b) probability of decay per unit time is the decay constant C1

λ = ln 2 / t½
= 0.693 / (52 × 24 × 3600) C1
= 1.54 × 10–7 s–1 A1 [3]
(c) (i) A = A0 exp(–λt)

7.4 × 106 = A0 exp(–1.54 × 10–7 × 21 × 24 × 3600) C1
A0 = 9.8 × 106 Bq A1 [2]
(alternative method uses 21 days as 0.404 half-lives)
(ii) A = λN and mass = N × 89 / NA C1

mass = (9.8 × 106 × 89) / (1.54 × 10–7 × 6.02 × 1023)
= 9.4 × 10–9 g A1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE © University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

= 1.8 × 10 m A1 [5]
(ii) wavelength is about separationPAofGEatoms

271
B1
can be used in (electron) diffraction B1 [2]
16
8 (a) (i) x = 2 A1 [1]
(ii) either beta particle or electron B1 [1]
(b) (i) mass of separate nucleons = {(92 × 1.007) + (143 × 1.009)} u C1

= 236.931 u C1
binding energy = 236.931 u – 235.123 u
= 1.808 u A1 [3]

GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2 013 97 02 41
17
8 (a) two (light) nuclei combine
M1
to form a more massive nucleus A1 [2]
(b) (i) ∆m = (2.01410 u + 1.00728 u) – 3.01605 u

= 5.33 × 10–3 u C1
energy = c2 × ∆m C1
= 5.33 × 10–3 × 1.66 × 10–27 × (3.00 × 108 )2
= 8.0 × 10–13 J A1 [3]
(ii) speed/kinetic energy of proton and deuterium must be very large B1

so that the nuclei can overcome electrostatic repulsion B1 [2]
Section B
9 (a) (i) light-dependent resistor/LDR
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2 0 1 3 9702 B1
42 [1]
18
8 (a) (ii) strain
energy gaugeout / released on formation of the α-particle (or reverse argument) B1
is given M1 [1]
either E = mc2 so mass is less
or quartz/piezo-electric
(iii) crystalequivalence
reference to mass-energy B1
A1 [1]
[2]
(b) (i) resistance

(b) (i) mass changeof thermistor
= 18.00567 decreases as temperature
u – 18.00641 u increses M1
C1
etiher VOUT ==V7.4 × R× /10
(R–4 +u R(sign
T) not required) A1 [2]
or current increases and VOUT = I R A1
OUT increases
(ii) Venergy = c2∆m A1 [3]
8 2 –4 –27
= (3.0 × 10 ) × 7.4 × 10 × 1.66 × 10 C1
(ii) either change in–13 R with temperature is non-linear
= 1.1 × 10 TJ A1 [2]
or VOUT is not proportional to RT/ change in VOUT with RT is non-linear M1
(allow
so use is
change u = 1.67 × 10–27 kg)
ofnon-linear A1 [2]
(allow method based on 1u equivalent to 930 MeV to 933 MeV)
10 (a) (iii) mass

either how
sharpness: of products
well the edgesgreater than mass
(of structures) areofdefined
reactants M1
B1
this mass/energy
contrast: difference in (degreeprovided as kinetic
of) blackening energy
between of the helium-4 nucleus
structures A1
B1 [2]
or both nuclei positively charged (M1)
energy required to overcome electrostatic repulsion (A1) [2]
(b) e.g. scattering of photos in tissue/no use of a collimator/no use of lead grid
large penumbra on shadow/large area anode/wide beam
large pixel size
(c) (i) I = I0 e–µx C1

ratio = exp(–2.85 × 3.5) / exp(–0.95 × 8.0) C1
(b) ratio
energy= plost
e / p(as
p = √(m e / menergy)
thermal p) in resistance/wires/battery/resistor C1 B1 [1]
–31 –27
ratio
(award= √{(9.1 10 ) /in(1.67
only if×answer (a)(i)× >10answer
)} in (a)(ii)2)
ratio = 2.3 × 10 –2
PA GE 272 A1 [4]
7 (a) graph: VH increases from zero when current switched on B1

19
8 (a) energy V
toH separate nucleons
then non-zero (in a nucleus)
constant M1B1
separate
VHtoreturns
infinityto zero when current switched off A1 B1 [2]
[3]
(b) (i) fission B1 [1]

(b) (i) (induced) e.m.f. proportional to rate M1
U: nearofright-hand
of change
(ii) 1. (magnetic)end
fluxof(linkage)
line B1 A1 [1]
[2]
(ii) 2.
pulse Mo:
as to right of
current is peak,
being less than 1/3
switched on distance from peak to U B1 B1 [1]
zero e.m.f. when current in coil B1
pulse
3. in 0.4
La: opposite
→ 0.6direction when
of distance from switching
peak to off
U B1 B1 [1][3]
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9702 41
8 (a) discrete and equal amounts (of charge) B1 [1]
1. right-hand
(iii) allow: side, mass
discrete amounts = 235.922
of 1.6 u
× 10–19C/elementary charge/e C1
mass change = 0.210 u –19
integral multiples of 1.6 × 10 C/elementary charge/e A1 [2]
2. energy = mc2 C1
(b) weightenergy
= qV / d= 0.210 × 1.66–11 × 10–27
© Cambridge International
× (3.0 × 10 8 2
Examinations
) 2013
4.8 × 10energy
–14 =×
= (q 3.1374 × 10× 10J–3)
680)/(7.0 C1 C1
q = 4.9energy
× 10 =C196 MeV (need 3 s.f.)
–19 A1 A1 [3][2]
(use of 1 u = 934 MeV, allow 3/3; use of 1 u = 930 MeV or 932
MeV, allow 2/3)
–27 –27
(use
(c) elementary of 1.67 ×= 10
charge 1.6 ×not 1.66
10–19 (allowscores
C ×10 1.6 × 10max.
–19 2/3)
C to 1.7 × 10–19 C ) M0
or it is a common factor C1
it is the highest common factor Section B A1 [2]
9 (a) operates on / takes signal from sensing device B1
20
9 (a)(soe.g.
that)
noittime
givesdelay
an voltage
between output
illumination and emission B1 [2]
(b) thermistor
rateand resistor in
of emission of series between
electrons +4 V line
dependent and earth to intensity
on/proportional M1
VOUT shown clearly across either thermistor or resistor
(any three separate statements, one mark each, maximum 3) A1 B3 [3]
VOUT shown clearly across thermistor A1 [3]
(b) (i) (photon) interaction with electron may be below surface B1

(c) e.g. remote
energyswitching
required to bring electron to surface B1 [2]
e.g. switching large current by means of a small current
Pagee.g.5 isolating circuit from high voltage
Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
e.g. switching high
GCEvoltage
AS/Aby means
LEVEL – of a small
May/J unevoltage/current
20 14 9702 41
(any two sensible suggestions, 1 each to max. 2) B2 [2]
(ii) 1. threshold frequency = 5.8 × 1014 Hz A1 [1]
10 (a) pulse
2. (of
Φ ultrasound)
= hf0 B1C1
–34
produced=by6.63 quartz × 5.8 × 1014
/ piezo-electric
× 10 crystal (1)
reflected from –19 (between media)
boundaries B1C1
= 3.84 × 10 (J)
reflected pulse
= (3.84 × 10–19)/(1.6 × 10–19)
detected B1
by the ultrasound
= 2.4 eVtransmitter (1) A1 [3]
signal processed and displayed B1
intensity
or of reflected pulse gives information about the boundary (1)
time delay gives information about depth (1)
(four Bhfmarks plus
= Φ + EMAX any two from the four, max. 6) B2(C1) [6]
chooses point on©line Cambridge International
and substitutes Examinations
values 2014
EMAX, f and h into
equation with the units of the hf term converted from J to eV (C1)
(b) shorterΦwavelength
= 2.4 eV B1(A1)
smaller structures resolved / detected (not more sharpness) B1 [2]
10 (a)COLLEGE
CEDAR energy required to separate the nucleons (in a nucleus) PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
M1
I = I0 e–µx
(c) to(i)infinity C1A1 [2]
(allowratio = exp(–23
reverse × 6.4 × 10–2)
statement) C1
ratio = 0.23 A1 [3]
m=
q / hf forΦA+isEtwice
MAX that for B (C1)
B1
chooses point
ions in path A have on (same
line and substitutes
mass values
but) twice EMAX, f (of
the charge andions
h into
in path B) B1 [3]
equation with the units of the hf term converted from J to eV (C1)
PA GE 273
Φ = 2.4 eV (A1)
7 (a) angle subtended at the centre of a circle B1
21
10
by an arc equal in length to the radius
(a) energy required to separate the nucleons (in a nucleus)
B1
M1
[2]
to infinity A1 [2]
(allow
(b) (i) arc reverse statement)
R distance × angle C1
diameter R 3.8 × 105 × 9.7 × 10–6
= = = R 3.7 km A1 [2]
(b) (i) ∆m = (2 × 1.00867) + 1.00728 – 3.01551 C1
(ii) Mars= is 9.11 × 10–3
(much) u
further from–3Earth / away (answer must be comparative) C1
B1
binding
angle (atenergy = 9.11
telescope is × 10 ×smaller
much) 930 B1 [2]
= 8.47 MeV A1 [3]
8 (a) photon(allow 2 s.f.)R hc / λ
energy
R (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108) / (590 × 10–9 ) C1
(ii) ∆m = 211.70394 – 209.93722
R 3.37 × 10–19 J C1
= 1.76672 u C1
binding energy per nucleon = (1.76672 × 930)/210 C1
number R (3.2 × 10–3) / (3.37 × 10–19 )
= 7.82 MeV A1 [3]
= = = R 9.5 × 1015 (allow 9.4 × 1015) A1 [3]
(allow 2 s.f.)
(b) (i) p R h / λ C1
–34
= = total
(c) R (6.63
= binding × 10of
energy )barium 10–9krypton
/ (590 ×and ) M1
–27 –1
= = is greater
= 1.12 binding
R than × 10 kg m s of uranium
energy C1
A1 [2]
total momentum R 9.5 × 1015 × 1.12 × 10–27

= = = R 1.06 × 10–11 kg m s–1 A1 [3]
Section B
(ii) force R 1.06 × 10–11 N A1 [1]
11 (a) (i) inverting amplifier B1 [1]
229 timegain
(a) (ii) for number of atoms / nuclei / activity (of the isotope)
is very large/infinite M1
B1
to beV+reduced to one half (of its initial value)
is earthed/zero A1
B1 [2]
for amplifier not to saturate, P must be (almost) earth/zero B1 [3]
(b) (i) A R λN C1
(b) (i) R 460
A =R100 × ln 2 / (8.1 × 24 × 60 × 60)
N kΩ C1
A1
NB R
R = 10 × 108
4.6kΩ A1
A1 [3]
VIN = 1000 mV A1 [3]
(ii) number of water molecules in 1.0 kg R (6.02 × 1023) / (18 × 10–3) C1
(ii) variable range meter R 3.3 × 1025 B1 [1]
25 8
ratio R (3.3 × 10 ) / (4.6 × 10 )
Page 5 1016 MarkInternational
R 7.2 (7.3)©×Cambridge Scheme Examinations 2014 Syllabus Paper
A1 [2]
(c) A R A0 e–λt and λt½ R ln 2 C1
170 R 460 exp (–{ln 2 t } / 8.1) C1
t R 11.6 days (allow 2 s.f.) A1 [3]
Section B
10 (a) compares the potentials/voltages at the (inverting and non-inverting) inputs B1
either output (potential) dependent on which input is the larger

or V+ > V–, then VOUT is positive B1
states the other condition B1 [3]

(b) (i) ring drawn around both the LEDs (and series resistors) B1 [1]
(ii) V– R (1.5 × 2.4) / (1.2 N 2.4) R 1.0 V B1 [1]

= 2.86
(ii) sketch eV (allowdeflection
showing: 2 s.f.) consistent with force in (b)(i) A1
B1 [4]
reasonable curve B1 [2]
(ii) arrow pointing in either directionPAbetween
GE 274 –3.41 eV and –0.55 eV B1 [1]
8 (a) discrete amount / packet / quantum of energy M1

23
9 (a) ‘light’ nuclei combineradiation
to form /‘heavier’ nuclei B1 [1]
of electromagnetic EM radiation A1 [2]
2
(b)
(b) (i)
(i) either
E = hcenergy
/ λ = c ∆m 8 2
or energy
= (6.63=×(3.00
10–34××103.0) ××10 1.66
8
) / × 10–27
(570 × 10–9) = 3.49 × 10–19 J C1
A1 [1]
–10
energy = 1.494 × 10 J C1
–10 –13
(ii) 1. number= (1.494
= (2.7 × 10)–3/ )(1.60
× 10 / (3.5××10 10–19)) C1
= 934=MeV
7.7 ×(310s.f.)
15 A1
A1 [3]
[2]
2. =momentum
(ii) ∆m (2.01356 +of
3.01551)
photon –=(4.00151
h/λ + 1.00867) C1
= 5.02907 – 5.01018 = (6.63 × 10–34) / (570 × 10–9)
= 0.01889 u C1
= 1.16 × 10–27 kg m s–1 C1
energy = 0.01889 × 934
change in momentum = 1.16 × 10–27 × 7.7 × 1015
= 17.6 MeV (allow 2 s.f.) A1 [2]
= 8.96 × 10–12 kg m s–1 A1 [3]
(iii) high temperature means high speeds / kinetic energy of nuclei B1
D and(allow E =collide
T nuclei pc route 10–12) one another
to 9 ×repelling
despite B1 [2]
(c) pressure = (change in momentum per second) / area C1

= (8.96 × 10–12) / (1.3 × 10–5)
= 6.9 × 10–7 Pa A1 [2]

249 (a) activity = (1.7 × 1014) / (2.5 × 106)
= 6.8 × 107 Bq kg–1 A1 [1]
(b) (i) energy released per second in 1.0 kg of steel

= 6.8 × 107 × 0.067 × 1.6 × 10–13
= 7.3 × 10–7 J B1 [1]
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9702 43
(ii) this is a very small quantity of energy so steel will not be warm B1 [1]
(iii) A = A0 e–λt and λt½ = ln 2 C1
400 = (6.8 × 107) exp(–[ln 2 × t] / 92) C1
t = 1600 years A1
or
A = A0 / 2 n (C1)
n = 17.4 (C1)
t = 17.4 × 92 = 1600 years (A1) [3]
Section B
10 (a) (i) thermistor / thermocouple B1 [1]
(ii) quartz crystal / piezoelectric crystal or transducer / microphone B1 [1]
(b) (i) VOUT = –5 V A1

inverting input is positive or V– is positive or V– > V+ so VOUT is negative B1
CEDAR COLLEGEop-amp has very large / infinite gain and so saturates PHYSICS: WORKBOOK
B1 [3]
(ii) sketch: VOUT switches from (+) to (–) when VIN is zero B1
= (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108 ) / (6.80 × 10–12) C1
(ii) deflected
= 2.93 × 10–14has
electron energy2 s.f.)
J (accept M1
A1 [2]
this energy is derived from the PAincident photon
GE 275–14
A1
deflected
2. photon
energy of has =less
electron energy,
(3.06 – 2.93) longer
× 10 wavelength (so ∆λ always positive) B1 [3]
= 1.3 × 10–15 J C1
25 speed = (2E / m ) C1
9 (a) nucleus/nuclei emits M1
= 5.4 × 107 m s–1
spontaneously/randomly A1
A1 [3]
α-particles, β-particles, γ-ray photons A1 [3]
(c) momentum is a vector quantity B1
(i) N must
(b) either – ∆N consider momentum in two directions A1 [1]
or direction changes so cannot just consider magnitude B1 [2]
(ii) ∆N / ∆t A1 [1]
7 (a) (iii)
moving∆Nmagnet
/N gives rise to/causes/induces e.m.f./current in solenoid/coil B1
A1 [1]
(induced current) creates field/flux in solenoid that opposes (motion of) magnet B1
work ∆N
(iv) is done/energy
/ N∆t is needed to move magnet (into solenoid) B1
A1 [1]
(induced) current gives heating effect (in resistor) which comes from the work done B1 [4]
(c) graph: smooth curve in correct direction starting at (0,0) M1

(b) current in primary coil give rise to (magnetic) flux/field B1
n at 2t½ is 1.5 times that at t½ (± 2 mm) A1 [2]
(magnetic) flux / field (in core) is in phase with current (in primary coil) B1
(magnetic) flux threads/links/cuts secondary coil inducing e.m.f. in secondary coil B1
(there must be a mention of secondary coil)
e.m.f. induced proportional © Cambridge International
to rate of Examinations
change/cutting 2015so not in phase
of flux/field B1 [4]
26
8 (a) (i) energy = 5.75 × 1.6 × 10–13
= 9.2 × 10–13 J A1 [1]
(ii) number = 1900 / (9.2 × 10–13 × 0.24) C1

= 8.6 × 1015 s–1 A1 [2]
(b) (i) decay constant = 0.693 / (2.8 × 365 × 24 × 3600) C1

= 7.85 × 10–9 s–1 (allow 7.8 or 7.9 to 2 s.f.) A1 [2]
(ii) A = λN
8.6 × 1015 = 7.85 × 10–9 × N C1
N = 1.096 × 1024 C1
mass = (1.096 × 1024 × 236) / (6.02 × 1023) M1

= 430 g A1 [4]
(c) 0.84 = 1.9 exp(–7.85 × 10–9 t) C1

t = 1.04 × 108 s
= 3.3 years A1 [2]

∆ energy = ½ × 2800 × 10–6 × (9.02 – 6.02) C1
= 6.3 × 10–2 J PA GE 276 A1 [3]
27
8 (a) op-amp has infinite/(very) large gain B1
op-amp saturates if V + ≠ V – M1
V+ is at earth potential so P (or V–) must be at earth A1 [3]

(b) input resistance to op-amp is very AS/A
Cambridge International large Level – May/June 2016 9702 42
or
(i) (X–ray)
12 (a) current in R2photon produced
= current in R1 when electron/charged particle is B1
stopped/accelerated (suddenly) B1
VIN (– 0) = IR2 and (0) – VOUT = IR1 M1
range of accelerations (in target) M1
VOUT / VIN = –R1 / R2 A1 [3]
hence distribution of wavelengths A1 [3]
relayelectron
(c) (ii) gives allbetween
coil connected its energy to one
VOUT and photon
earth B1
M1
electron
correct diodestopped in single collision
symbol connected between VOUT and coil or between coil and earth B1
M1 [2]
(iii) de-excitation
correct polarity forofdiode
(orbital) electrons in target/anode/metal
(‘clockwise’) B1
A1 [1]
[3]
9 (b) (i) aluminium

(a) 0.10 mm sheet/filter/foil (placed in beam from tube) B1
B1 [1]
[1]
(ii) (long wavelength X-rays) do not pass through the body B1 [1]
(b) VH = (0.13 × 3.8) / (6.0 × 1028 × 0.10 × 10–3 × 1.60 × 10–19) C1
28
13 (a) (photons
= 5.1of) electromagnetic
× 10 –7
V radiation M1
A1 [2]
emitted from nuclei A1 [2]
10 (a) (non-uniform) magnetic flux in core is changing M1
(b) line of best
induces fit drawn
(different) e.m.f. in (different parts of) the core B1
A1
recognises µ as form
(eddy) currents giveninby
thethe gradient of best-fit line
core M1
or
ln C = give
which ln C0rise
– µxto heating B1
A1 [4]
µ = 0.061 mm–1 (within ±0.004 mm–1, 1 mark; within ±0.002 mm–1, 2 marks) A2 [4]
(c) aluminium is less absorbing (than lead)

or © Cambridge International Examinations 2016
gradient of graph would be less M1
so µ is smaller A1 [2]
!

A2 - Workbook 3 Updated PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

A2 - Workbook 3 Updated PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

PA GE 1

CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

1 May/June 2009 , Question #8 , qp_4

CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

2 Oct/Nov 2010 , Question #7 , qp_41

(ii) the particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation.

Fig. 7.1 (not to scale)

(i) state the number of lines,

(ii) calculate the minimum wavelength.

wavelength = ........................................... m [2]

CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

© UCLES 2010 9702/41/O/N/10

3 Oct/Nov 2010 , Question #8 , qp_43 18

CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

4 May/June 2011 , Question #7 , qp_41 14

7 Experiments are conducted to investigate the photoelectric effect. For

immediately or they are not emitted at all.

work function energy = ............................................. J [3]

CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

State and explain the effect of this change on

(i) the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons,

(ii) the maximum photoelectric current I.

© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11 [Turn over

5 Oct/Nov 2011 , Question #7 , qp_41 15

wavelength = ............................................ m [3]

CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

© UCLES 2011 9702/41/O/N/11

CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

6 Oct/Nov 2011 , Question #7 , qp_43 14

(ii) work function energy.

(b) In an experiment to investigate the photoelectric effect, a student measures the

(i) The work function energy of the metal surface is Φ.

(b) In an experiment to investigate the photoelectric effect, a student measures the

(i) The work function energy of the metal surface is Φ.

CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

2. a value for the Planck constant.

Planck constant = ........................................... J s [3]

7 May/June 2012 , Question #7 , qp_42 15

7 The photoelectric effect may be represented by the equation For

(a) State what is meant by work function energy.

© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12 [Turn over

© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

8 May/June 2013 , Question #7 , qp_41

metal Φ / 10–19 J f0 / 1014 Hz

(a) (i) State what is meant by the threshold frequency.

(ii) Calculate the threshold frequency for platinum.

threshold frequency = ............................................ Hz [2]

(b) Electromagnetic radiation having a continuous spectrum of wavelengths between

9 May/June 2013 , Question #7 , qp_42

CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

(i) On Fig. 7.1,

wavelength = ............................................. m [3]

photon energies .................................................................................... eV [2]

© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13 [Turn over

10 Oct/Nov 2013 , Question #7 , qp_41 14

The emergent electrons are incident on a fluorescent screen.

CEDAR COLLEGE PHYSICS: WORKBOOK

de Broglie wavelength of the proton

ratio = .................................................. [4]

© UCLES 2013 9702/41/O/N/13 [Turn over

11 May/June 2014 , Question #8 , qp_42

8 Light of wavelength 590 nm is incident normally on a surface, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.

(a) Calculate the number of photons incident on the surface in 1.0 s.